JP2023068171A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 having a so-called limiting function for always setting a jackpot probability of a special pattern to a low-probability state each time when a predetermined number of jackpots occur is configured such that a "setting suggestive performance" is easily won as the number of winning times of a jackpot type disadvantageous to a player approaches the number of limit times. Also, the Pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to more concretely and easily suggest a winning probability of a lottery for executing a "setting suggestive performance" and contents of a probability setting value of the Pachinko machine 10 in the "setting suggestive performance" by winning a jackpot again in a situation in which a hold-back jackpot is won during a hold-back period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also one that has a function (so-called limiter function) to transition the game state after the end of the game to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295672 A

For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest in the game and increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can generate a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on establishment, determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and a predetermined lottery result derived by the determination means and special game generating means for generating a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player, and a set value relating to the probability of deriving the predetermined lottery result by the determining means can be set. setting means; first transition means for shifting the game state after the special game state to the first game state when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result; second transition means for shifting the game state after the special game state to the second game state when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result; counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result is derived; and count updating means for updating the count result of the counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means; and gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information related to the gaming machine to the player, wherein the determining means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, determines the predetermined As a result of the lottery, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the normal determination means that can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result and the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means for deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as a predetermined lottery result, wherein the gaming machine information suggesting means provides set value information regarding the set value set by the setting means. as the gaming machine information; frequency information suggesting means for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, frequency information relating to the number of derivations counted by the counting means; and the set value by the setting information suggesting means. A start timing non-overlapping means for executing the suggestion start timing of the information and the suggestion start timing of the number of times information by the number of times information suggestion means so as not to overlap each other.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to generate a predetermined first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Determination information acquisition means for acquiring information; determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means; and a special game generation means for generating a special game state that can give a game value of , setting means for setting a set value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means; When a predetermined first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, a first transition means for shifting the game state after the special game state to the first game state, and as the predetermined lottery result, the When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived, a second transition means for shifting the game state after the special game state to the second game state, and the predetermined lottery result is derived. a counting means for counting the number of times of derivation, a count updating means for updating the counting result of the counting means when the counting means counts the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result by a predetermined number; gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting information to the player, wherein the determining means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, determines the predetermined lottery result as: When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the normal determination means capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result and the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined lottery result is , arrival time determination means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result, wherein the gaming machine information suggesting means transmits set value information related to the set value set by the setting means to the gaming machine information a setting information suggesting means for suggesting as the game machine information the number of times information relating to the number of times of derivation counted by the counting means; and a timing for starting to suggest the setting value information by the setting information suggesting means. and start timing non-overlapping means for executing the suggestion start timing of the number of times information by the number of times information suggesting means so as not to overlap. As a result, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot random number table typically. It is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 jackpot type table. It is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type table. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a game flow in a pachinko machine; It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of a reservation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is , and a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot opening table. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a setting suggestion lottery table; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the content lottery table of suggestion. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of a possessed information storage area and an execution information storage area; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing limit processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows processing during opening performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing jackpot command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a setting suggestion lottery process executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot effect process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a case where "round matching" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", and (a) shows a state in which a big win result is derived in the variable effect on the third symbol display device. It is a figure, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is started from the state of (a) and the fifth round is being performed, and (c) is a jackpot game from the state of (b). is progressing and the "setting suggestion effect" is being executed in the 6th round, and (d) is a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the state of (c) and the 7th round is being performed. It is the figure which showed the state where it is. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a case where "another round" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggesting effect", and (a) shows a state in which a big win result is derived in the variable effect on the third symbol display device. It is a figure, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is started from the state of (a) and the fourth round is performed, and (c) is a jackpot game from the state of (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the "setting suggestion effect" is being executed in the 5th round after progressing, and (d) shows that the jackpot game progresses from the state of (c) and the 6th round is being performed. It is the figure which showed the state. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a case where "round matching" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", and (a) shows a state in which a big win result is derived in the variable effect on the third symbol display device. It is a figure, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is started from the state of (a) and the fifth round is being performed, and (c) is a jackpot game from the state of (b). is progressing and the "setting suggestion effect" is being executed in the 6th round, and (d) is a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the state of (c) and the 7th round is being performed. It is the figure which showed the state where it is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot random number table of the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an example of a special figure 2 jackpot random number table of the second embodiment It is a diagram showing. It is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 jackpot type table of the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit production processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit production processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device of a 4th embodiment. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a case where "round matching" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggesting effect" of the fourth embodiment, and (a) shows the variation effect in the third symbol display device of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot result is derived, and (b) shows a state in which a “round start display” indicating that a jackpot game is started from the state of (a) and the first round is started is displayed. (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the first round is being performed from the state of (b), and (d) is a diagram showing the progress of the jackpot game from the state of (c). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a "round start display" indicating that the sixth round starts is displayed, and (e) shows that the sixth round is performed from the state of (d), and in the sixth round " (f) shows a state in which a "round start display" indicating that the 7th round will start from the state of (e) is displayed. is.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 42, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch (not shown) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). .

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super ready-to-win effect, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is a effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (first starting hole 64a described later or third 2 starting port 64b (see FIG. 3) is executed when the ball is entered (start winning), and after symbols (third symbols described later) are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed , is an effect of presenting the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) to the player for the start winning prize.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects, such as the variable effects described above and the ready-to-win effects executed during the variable effects, are designed to be performed according to the themes given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed change invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Further, when the effect element of "normal reach" to be described later is started in the variable effect performed by the third pattern display device 81, the effect element of "normal reach" develops into the effect element of "super reach" to be described later. It is configured so that the selection screen of the effect element of "super reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the effect element of "normal reach".

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect element candidates that can be selected as the effect element of "super reach" are displayed, and one of the effect element candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect element candidate is changed. Then, based on the effect element candidate selected when developing into the effect element of "super reach" (that is, at the end of the selection screen), the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined, and according to the content " The effect element of "Super Reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. , rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the production element of "super reach" may be selected.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. The ball shooting interval of the ball shooting unit 112a is set at about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board that constitutes the main controller 110, a setting key 501 is used by a person involved in the hall or the like to change the set probability setting value or to confirm the set probability setting value. Setting change switch 502 used when updating the probability setting value by being operated during setting change, and when wanting to initialize the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 110), or probability setting value during setting change and a probability display device 504 capable of displaying the set probability value.

The setting key 501, the setting change switch 502, and the RAM erasing switch 503 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100. It is possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main substrate covered by the substrate box 100 .

The setting key 501 can be switched between the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON" by inserting a dedicated key managed by a hall official or the like into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable between two positions. The setting key 501 is turned off when positioned on the off side, and turned on when positioned on the on side. Each state is maintained as long as it is not operated.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when changing the probability setting value (that is, "setting change mode" to be described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is a switch for erasing (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 by being operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Also, the RAM erase switch 503 is used to end the update of the probability setting value (that is, end the "setting change mode") when changing the probability setting value (that is, the "setting change mode" to be described later). be done.

In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (that is, when the power switch is turned on) and the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed, the setting key 501 is turned off. 110 outputs a RAM erase signal for clearing the backup data. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal is input, and the payout control device 111 also controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Send to device 111 .

Further, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in a probability set value updateable state (that is, a "setting change mode" to be described later), the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability set values is to be terminated, and performs the probability setting. End the value updateable state and shift to the normal game state.

The probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value when confirming the probability setting value (i.e., "setting confirmation mode" to be described later) or when changing the probability setting value (i.e., "setting change mode" to be described later). is configured as The probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, when the game is available or when the power is turned off), and the probability setting value is not displayed. In the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode"), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, the startup mode at the time of power startup in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the states of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. is configured to

As the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", "setting confirmation mode" and "normal mode" are prepared.

The "RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

The "setting change mode" is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the current probability setting value, and the probability setting value is updated each time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, by pressing the setting change switch 502 during this "setting change mode", the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated, and the probability is updated as the probability setting value is updated. The display on display device 504 is also changed.

The "setting confirmation mode" is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting confirmation mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504. - 特許庁

The "normal mode" is a startup mode other than the "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", and "setting confirmation mode". This is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203, except when the stored data is broken. be.

In the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 503 (that is, remaining in the off state) and while the setting key 501 remains in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 Start up in "normal mode". When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "RAM clear mode".

On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting change mode". When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is kept off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting confirmation mode".

In addition, when the data is erased in the "RAM clear mode", when the update of the probability setting value is completed in the "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or in the "setting confirmation mode" When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the "normal mode", and the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be started.

Thus, if the setting key 501 is turned off when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated by the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a "RAM clear mode" or a "normal mode" which is a start-up mode unrelated to the set probability value.

On the other hand, when turning on the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up according to whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As a mode, it is possible to select a "setting change mode" or a "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or turned on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability set value and a startup mode related to the probability set value can be selected. When the start-up mode that is not related to the set probability value is selected, the start-up mode is set to "RAM clear mode" or "normal mode" depending on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. You can choose to

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game is changed. If the pachinko machine 10 does not have a predetermined game performance, such as a discrepancy with the jackpot probability of the variable performance to be acquired from now on, or the jackpot counted as the limit number of times described later is accumulated while each jackpot probability is different. may not be able to demonstrate Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability setting value is changed in the "setting change mode". On the other hand, the "setting confirmation mode" is a start-up mode for only confirming the probability setting value, so that the data stored in the RAM 203 is held (cleared) so that the game can be continued by taking over the game state before power failure do not).

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on. is turned on, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting confirmation mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off. I decided to turn on the power.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. . Then, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode" for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, while pressing the RAM erase switch 503 (while turning it on), the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. to turn on. In other words, if the people involved in the hall understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started from now on.

Also, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily confirming the probability set value and searching for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability or arbitrarily changing the probability set value to a high probability (high setting). In addition, since the RAM erase switch 503 is provided at a position that is not easily touched by the normal player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability set value to a high probability.

Furthermore, the number of switches to be operated at the same time is two even when starting up in the "setting change mode", and since both hands can be sufficiently operated, the operability is good. As described above, the persons involved in the hall can easily and simply select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 .

When starting up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a door opening switch (not shown) that detects whether the inner frame 12 is open ) is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is open.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for a person involved in the hall or the like to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. 12 must be open. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" is not activated. As in the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, if the RAM erasure switch 503 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "normal mode", and if the RAM erasure switch 503 is on, the pachinko machine is started in the "RAM clear mode". raise 10. As a result, although the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine starts up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". 10, it is possible to prevent the game from starting. Further, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, it is possible for the player to open the inner frame 12 arbitrarily, check the probability setting value, search for the pachinko machine 10 with a high probability of big win, or arbitrarily change the probability setting value to a high probability. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, A first starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b, an ordinary electric circuit 64c, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

The general prize winning port 63, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the ordinary electric terminal 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 or the first special symbol or A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable effect of the third pattern while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special pattern, and a ball of the through gate 67. A normal symbol display device 83 is provided, which is composed of LEDs that variably display the normal symbols (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbols is referred to as "variable display") triggered by the passage of the . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later. are displayed (not shown).

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol display device 37 displays the game state under the control of the main controller 110, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is displayed in the third mode. It is performed by the pattern display device 81 . Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1. ) is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability-variable state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main patterns (corresponding to "high-probability patterns") to which odd numbers are added are aligned on the effective line L1. On the other hand, when shifting to a low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable display (variation effect). The main display area Dm is the main display area Dm, and the upper one-third of the other area is the sub display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like. In addition, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 on the lower base side.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. A symbol row Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable display (variation effect) has not been performed among the balls entered into the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. This is the area where

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

On the other hand, while the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), the ball When a ball is entered into the 1 start hole 64a, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. is also shown. In the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, there is one reserved design (in the normal display mode, "○" design ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of display of the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol is displayed. be done.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is one time, and when a total of two reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved design display areas Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special design indicates that it is 2 times, and when a total of three reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 1 first to third reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 3 times, and if a total of four reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 4 times. In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design is 0 and there is a fluctuation effect that is reserved indicate not to

Also, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation performance (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball When a ball is entered into the second starting port 64b, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. is also shown. In the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, 1 reserved design (in the normal display mode, "○" design ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of suspended balls of the second special symbol variation effect is displayed. be done.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, if one reserved design is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is one time, and when a total of two reserved designs are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved design display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special design indicates that it is 2 times, and when a total of three reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special design indicates that it is 3 times, and if a total of four reserved designs are displayed one each in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 4 times. In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved design display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 0 and there is a fluctuation effect that is reserved indicate not to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. is configured to Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed is completed, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively, is configured to preferentially execute the second lottery game of the second special symbol over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). In addition, the lottery game may be executed in order of winning (so-called winning order change), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (so-called special 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) may be configured.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, It is configured to display an execution symbol that is larger than each of the reserved symbols displayed in each of the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. In addition, in this execution design display area Db0, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution design. be.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when the variable effect is completed, and along with the erasure of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (if it is the first special symbol, the right side, the second 2 If it is a special symbol, it is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved designs of the second special design and there are four reserved designs of the first special design, the end of the fluctuation production of the first special design or the second special design When the execution design displayed in the execution design display area Db0 is erased along with, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 first reservation design display area Db1a is moved as the execution design in the execution design display area Db0. (shifted). Also, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved design display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved design display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 1 second reserved design display area Db1b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved design display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 1 third reserved design display area Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is done, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution design in the execution design display area Db0. Further, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved design display area Db2b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the special figure 2 first reserved design display area Db2a. Furthermore, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved design display area Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 2 second reserved design display area Db2b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved design display area Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the special figure 2 third reserved design display area Db2c.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be suspended up to four times at maximum. The number of balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description is continued. The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric player 64c above the second starting port 64b in the front view is a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (released) for a period of time.

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described special symbol display device 37, and the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. The normal design reservation lamps 84 are provided four times as many as the maximum number of reservations, and are arranged symmetrically above the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal design display device 83, as in the first embodiment, as well as the special design display device 37 or the third design display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a through which a ball can enter is provided. When the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main function described later is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. A jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is performed in the control device 110 (see FIG. 5). Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. A performance is performed. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the prize winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

On the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front and below a through gate 67, which will be described later, is disposed a second starting port 64b through which a ball can enter only when the normal electric terminal 64c is in an open state. ing. When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main function described later is caused by turning on the second starting port switch. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed in the control device 110 (see FIG. 5). Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. A performance is performed. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the prize winning holes from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

As described above, above the second starting port 64b in a front view, there is provided a plate-like ordinary electric member 64c that covers the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The normal electric member 64c protrudes from the board surface of the game board 13 to cover the opening to the second start port 64b, and sinks into the board surface of the game board 13 to cover the opening of the second start port 64b. It is configured to be displaceable between an open state and an open state. The second starting port 64b is normally in a closed state in which the normal electric element 64c protrudes from the board surface, and a ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) the second starting port 64b. there is

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the normal electric 64c of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric terminal 64c is being operated, the normal electric terminal 64c protrudes from the board surface and becomes immersed in the board surface, and the second starting port 64b is opened. When the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, it stops at the symbol "○" and wins, and the second start port 64b is opened, so that the ball enters the second start port 64b. A state can be created in which many large winning lotteries can be performed.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided below the first starting port 64a, and a horizontally long rectangular prize winning port (also called a large opening or specific prize winning port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. , the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, a predetermined number of times (16 times or 4 times) is performed until the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls have been won). until).

When the large winning opening 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses from opening or when a predetermined number of winnings is detected, and after that closure, the large winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player can win the game by winning the ball into the big winning hole 65a. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The big winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big win, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the large winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

The variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the ball can enter the big winning opening 65a in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game. A large winning opening switch (not shown) provided in the large winning opening 65a is turned on, and by counting the number of times the large winning opening switch is turned on, the number of balls winning the large winning opening 65a is counted. The closure condition of 65a is determined. In addition, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls due to turning on of the big winning hole switch. By repeating the open state and closed state of the big prize winning port 65a due to the big win, many balls are likely to enter the big winning prize port 65a, and the player can appreciate the game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A specific winning opening and a large open opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit in the special symbol display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times triggered by a ball entering the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening is open may be formed as a special game state. .

A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which a ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball shot into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to the turning on, the main controller 110 hits the normal symbol. A lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of normal symbols for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67, when it is determined to be a hit, the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 83, and the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed. After that, the ordinary electric terminal 64c provided above the second starting port 64b in a front view is operated. As a result, the plate of the ordinary electric member 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, moves into the board surface of the game board 13 from the state in which the second starting port 64b is closed, and moves to the predetermined position. A state in which the ball can enter the second starting port 64b for a period of time, or a state in which the ball can enter the second opening 64b more easily than in the closed state.

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is arranged in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part in FIG. 3). It is The special symbol display device 37 displays the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second Each variable display of special symbols (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2") (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols may be referred to as "dynamic display") is performed. , the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display has not been performed, among the balls that have won (entered) a first start port 64a or a second start port 64b, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot and an error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combinations of the emission colors suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, the "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from opening to closing of the jackpot 65a, which will be described later, to separate the number of prize balls in the jackpot. One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the start of opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls win during the opening of the big winning opening 65a.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic After displaying (in the first embodiment, the uppermost LED in the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (first embodiment , any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays dynamic display ( In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs of the lower LED group 37b2 are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment, Any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a jackpot, the type (type) of the jackpot is displayed. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is a big win or not is determined (big win lottery), and if it is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win. is also determined.

As the jackpot type determined here, "variable probability A" corresponding to "16 round (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") variable jackpot", "variable probability B" corresponding to "4R variable probability jackpot", "Latency probability variable A" corresponding to "4R latent probability variable jackpot", "Time saving A" corresponding to "4R time saving jackpot", "4R time saving jackpot" corresponding to "Rush A" are prepared ( 8 and 9).

Here, the "variable A" jackpot type corresponding to the "16R variable jackpot" means that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter " Until the occurrence of the next jackpot"), the probability state is higher than that of the "normal game state", and the probability of winning the normal symbols is also higher than that of the "normal game state" until the next jackpot occurs. It is a jackpot that shifts to a “probability fluctuation state”.

In addition, the jackpot type of “variable B” corresponding to “4R variable jackpot” is that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot occurs, The winning probability of normal symbols is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" until the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" based on the jackpot type "probability variation B", after the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times, it becomes the "latency probability fluctuation state" described later.

In addition, the jackpot type of “latent probability variable A” corresponding to “4R latent probability variable jackpot” is that after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the probability of winning the normal symbol is the same as the "normal game state" (so-called "no electric sapo" state), which is a low probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "latency probability fluctuation state"). It's a big hit.

In addition, the jackpot type of “time saving A” corresponding to “4R time saving jackpot” is a low probability that the jackpot probability of each special pattern is equivalent to “normal game state” after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. While it is in the state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. That is.

Furthermore, the jackpot type of “Push through A” corresponding to “4R time-saving jackpot” is that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is equivalent to “normal game state”. It is a big win that shifts to a game state (that is, "normal game state") that becomes a probability state and a low probability state where the winning probability of normal symbols is equivalent to "normal game state".

Here, each game state will be described in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal game state" refers to a game state other than the "variable probability state", the "variable latent probability state", or the "shortened time state", and the jackpot probability of each special symbol. , and a state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the state in which the opening of the normal electric part 64c is short time (so-called non-open extended state). That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", and more normal than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". Since the probability of winning the symbol is low and the opening time of the normal electric combination 64c is short, the game state (hereinafter referred to as the second The state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b is sometimes referred to as a "winning assist state"), but is the most unfavorable (lower advantage) gaming state for the player.

It should be noted that the right-handed game refers to the action of shooting a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. Balls can win through the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the second starting port 64b, which are arranged on the right side. A left-handed game refers to an action in which a shot ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, and the ball can win the general winning port 63, the first starting port 64a, or the variable winning device 65. Hereinafter, when a right-handed game or a left-handed game is called, it means a state in which a ball is shot in the above-described shooting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment, the right-handed game is allowed only in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time shortening state", and when the right-handed game is played in the "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", A predetermined warning function is provided to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game. Specifically, in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, It is determined that a right-handed game is being executed, and while configured to output an alarm sound from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 6), a "probability change state" and a "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged , even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the warning sound is not output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the right-handed game by the player in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged.

Next, in the "time shortening state", the probability of winning the jackpot of each special symbol is low as in the "normal game state", but the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is increased. A state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b for a long time (hereinafter, a function in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased and the opening time of the normal electrode 64c is extended is referred to as the "winning auxiliary function In addition, the state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased and the open time of the normal electric role 64c is increased to make it easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b is referred to as " This state may be referred to as "a state in which the winning assist function is activated"). That is, the ``shortened time state'' is a state in which a big win by a special symbol is equivalent to that in the ``normal game state'', but a win by a normal symbol is likely to be derived, and the open state of the normal electric combination 64c is lengthened. Therefore, in the "time shortening state", since it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the second starting port 64b, it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2, the second It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 ball/winning prize) based on the winning to the starting port 64b, and to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in the player's possession.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is, as described above, after the jackpot of the jackpot type "time reduction A" (see FIG. 8 or 9), a prescribed number of times predetermined for each jackpot. (100 times in the first embodiment) is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times (that is, after the end of the electric support), the "time shortening state" is shifted to the "normal game state". (See FIG. 10).

Next, in the "latent probability change state", after the end of the jackpot, it becomes a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value, while the probability of winning the normal symbol is low like the "normal game state". state. That is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big hit result by special symbols is likely to be derived, while a win by normal symbols is equivalent to the "normal game state". Therefore, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the winning auxiliary function is not activated, and it is difficult for the player to win the second start port 64b even when playing a right-handed game. , a game is played so as to let the ball enter the first starting port 64a by a left-handed game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, dynamic display of special symbols in the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of the jackpot type "variable probability A" (see FIG. 8) or after the jackpot of the jackpot type "variable probability B". is executed 100 times, the "latency probability fluctuation state" is entered. In this "latent probability change state", the high probability state of the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol hit probability are maintained until the next big win. In other words, once the game enters the "latency probability fluctuation state", the "latency probability fluctuation state" continues until the next big winning game with special symbols occurs. Furthermore, in this "latent probability fluctuation state", since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state, the game is played in a state where the jackpot game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol is likely to occur. It is possible to do

Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the effect executed in the "latency probability variable state" is the same as the "normal game state". Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the game is being played in the "normal game state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state" from the content of the presentation, and in which game state the game is being played. It is possible to play the game while guessing whether or not it is possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, in the ``probability fluctuation state'', a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of each subsequent special pattern is increased as an added value after the jackpot is completed, the winning probability of the normal pattern is increased, and the normal electric role 64c wins a prize. Auxiliary functions are activated. That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big win result by special symbols is likely to be derived, a win result by normal symbols is easily derived, and the open state of the normal electrode 64c is prolonged. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the winning auxiliary function is in operation, and almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game win the second start port 64b, so the dynamic display of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed. It is possible to perform the game while suppressing the reduction of the ball in hand by obtaining a prize ball (for example, one / prize) based on the prize to the second start port 64b, and furthermore, the special figure 2 A game can be played in a state in which a big win game (special game state) based on dynamic display is likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "variable probability state" can occur after the jackpot type "variable probability A" or "variable probability B" (see FIG. 8 or 9). In the case of the type "variable probability A", it is maintained until the next big hit occurs, and in the case of the big win type "variable probability B", it is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (100 times in the first embodiment). be. In addition, in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" based on the jackpot type "probability variation B", after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed (that is, after the "electric support end"), the "probability fluctuation state" to the "latency probability fluctuation state" (see FIG. 10).

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to the loss, 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability A", and "variable probability B" for the jackpot type. There are 13 types of display patterns corresponding to , 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent Probability A", 12 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time reduction A", and jackpot type "Push through A". There are 12 types of display patterns, for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, the player can recognize that the stop display of the losing is stopped, while the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable latent probability A”, “time saving A” or “rushing A” is difficult to identify.

In addition, as a stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to losing, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", and the jackpot type "time saving There are 31 types of display patterns corresponding to "A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, it can be recognized that the stop display of the losing is stopped, and the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "time reduction A" can be recognized. It is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a stop display.

By configuring in this way, even when each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are grasped , it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if "latent probability variation A" is won, the third symbol display device 81 displays the jackpot result corresponding to "passing through A" as a temporary display. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate which game state it is by executing an effect equivalent to "rushing A" even after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, even when the ``probability variation A'' is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the 3rd pattern display device 81 displays the jackpot result corresponding to the ``time saving A'' as a temporary display, and the jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state it is by executing an effect equivalent to "time saving A" even after the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to create a game feature that makes the player guess in which game state the game is being played, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the normal electric role 64c described later attached to the second start port 64b is opened, or the normal symbol is used once. It is also possible to change the number of times the normal electric terminal 64c is opened by winning. Specifically, in the "time shortening state" or the like, the time during which the normal electric terminal 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case of the "normal game state", or the normal The number of times the electric player 64c is released may be increased compared to the case of the "normal game state". In addition, in the "shortened time state", at least two of increasing the winning probability of normal symbols, increasing the opening time of the normal electric combination 64c, and increasing the number of times of opening the normal electric combination 64c are simultaneously performed. You may do so.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . A ball that has not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided through an out hole 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Also, the balls entering the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through the switches provided for each winning hole for detecting the entry of the ball. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball and is discharged to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Then, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol reservation lamp 84, and a front side centering on the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big winning opening 65a. Various solenoids 209 are connected, such as a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing and a normal electric solenoid for driving the normal electric 64c. Sends various commands and control signals to

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 sets the jackpot lottery for each special symbol, sets the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37, sets the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, and sets the display result of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, and a jackpot release table 202f. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the first embodiment will be described. These counters and the like are used to set the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the variable display results of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Also, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 15. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81 include the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number counter C1. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting a pattern stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance mode, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1. and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. In the first reserved ball storage area 203d, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 64a. be done. In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is set in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 64b. stored respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special pattern and the second special pattern stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment is for a low probability state used in the case of a special symbol low probability state where the game state is a "normal game state" or a "time reduction state" for each set value. and for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state", which is a high probability state of special symbols with a higher probability of winning a big win than the low probability state of special symbols. It is divided into two types.

For each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In addition, an increase in the number of big-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 50, and its value "0 to 49" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "1" is 50/10000 = 0.5/100 (that is, 0.5 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and the values "0 to 499" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "1" is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%). , The high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9950 random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "50". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9500 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "500 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing each special symbol with a set value of "1" in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9950/10000 = 99.5/100 (that is, 99.5 %), and the probability of losing in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 9500/10000 = 95/100 (that is, 95%) is set to be

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the values "0 to 51" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "2" is 52/10000 = 0.52/100 (that is, 0.52 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 520, and the values "0 to 519" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "2" is 520/10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2/100). 2%), and the high-probability state of the special symbols is set to make it easier to win 10 times the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9948 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "52". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9480 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "520 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "2" is 9948/10000 = 99.48/100 (that is, 99.48 %), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 9480/10000 = 94.8/100 (that is, 94 .8%).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5%→5.2%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the values "0 to 53" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "3" is 54/10000 = 0.54/100 (that is, 0.54 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 540, and the values "0 to 539" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "3" is 540/10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4/100). 4%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is easy to hit 10 times from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9946 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "54". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9460 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "540 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( setting). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "3" is 9946/10000 = 99.46/100 (that is, 99.46 %), and the probability of losing in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 9460/10000 = 94.6/100 (that is, 94 .6%).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2%→5.4%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "2".

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the values "0 to 55" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "4" is 56/10000 = 0.56/100 (that is, 0.56 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 560, and the values "0 to 559" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "latent probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "4" is 560/10000=5.6/100 (that is, 5.6/100). 6%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to make it easier to win 10 times the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9944 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "56". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9440 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "560 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( setting). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "4" is 9944/10000 = 99.44/100 (that is, 99.44 %), and the probability of losing in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 9440/10000 = 94.4/100 (that is, 94 .4%).

Therefore, the set value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4%→5.6%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "3".

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the values "0 to 57" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "5" is 58/10000 = 0.58/100 (that is, 0.58 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 580, and the values "0 to 579" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "5" is 580/10000=5.8/100 (that is, 5.8/100). 8%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is easy to hit 10 times from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "58". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9420 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "580 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( setting). That is, the probability of losing each special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") with the set value "5" is 9942/10000 = 99.42/100 (that is, 99.42 %), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 9420/10000 = 94.2/100 (that is, 94 .2%).

Therefore, the set value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6%→5.8%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "4".

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the values "0 to 59" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "6" is 60/10000 = 0.6/100 (that is, 0.6 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 600, and the values "0 to 599" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%). , The high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9940 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value "60". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9400 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "600 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the probability of losing in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the set value "6" is 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (that is, 99.4 %), and the probability of losing in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) is set to be

Therefore, the set value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8%→6%), which is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than when the set value is "5".

In this way, by changing the odds of winning a big win for each probability set value and changing the likelihood of winning a big win, it is possible to change the ball payout rate for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of game characteristics of the game played in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot is selected from the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot is selected from the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, That is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) that will result in a jackpot, a variable effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b includes a special-figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special-figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. and are provided.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a corresponding special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the number of special symbol jackpots is a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, 6 times. Hereinafter, the number of times is referred to as the "limit number of times"). ), the game state after the jackpot at the time of reaching the predetermined number of times is always shifted to a special pattern low probability state, and the transition to a special pattern high probability state is prohibited. A function (a so-called limiter function) is installed. That is, after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, every time the number of special symbol jackpots reaches six times (hereinafter, when the number of special symbol jackpots reaches the limit number of times, this is referred to as "at the time of reaching the limit"). There is), the jackpot type that becomes a high probability state of the special pattern is not selected after the end of the jackpot ), it is configured so that only the jackpot type that becomes a low probability state of special symbols after the jackpot ends can be selected.

On the other hand, if the number of special symbol jackpots has not reached the limit, that is, the number of jackpots is 1 to 5 times (hereinafter, the number of special symbol jackpots is 1 to 5 times is referred to as "before reaching the limit"). may be called) is configured so that a jackpot type that becomes a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot ends can be selected.

By configuring in this way, the special pattern low probability state can be ensured every time a predetermined number of big wins occur, and the special pattern high probability state continues to cause an excessive jackpot "Continuous". occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the pachinko machine 10 (the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) divided by the number of out balls) is the so-called machine ratio. It is possible to prevent a game result from appearing that is far from the "ball payout rate" below), and prevent the game value given to the player from becoming too high. In addition, in order to make the ball output rate of this pachinko machine 10 equal to that of a normal pachinko machine that does not have a limiter function, a special It is possible to compensate by making it easier to generate a big hit of the symbol, or by increasing the continuation rate of the high probability state of the special symbol before reaching the limit, which is not possible with a normal pachinko machine that does not have a limiter function. It is possible to realize a variety of playability that cannot be realized.

It should be noted that "continuous play" means that a state clearly advantageous to the player reappears in an advantageous state again. It refers to the case where one of the jackpots is won again in the "shortened state". Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which right-handed games can be played, it corresponds to "continuous play" and the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" ends. "Normal game state" after playing, or "latent probability change state" when "probability change state" is not notified and the winning auxiliary function is not activated, that is, during left-handed game If you win the jackpot, it does not correspond to the so-called "renso" (corresponds to the so-called "first time" jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the jackpot type table 202b is divided into the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and further divided according to whether the number of jackpots reaches the limit before or when the limit is reached. Among them, it is further divided into a group with the game state in which the big win occurred, and in the group, the type of special symbol (that is, whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the special symbol It is a table in which the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, until the next jackpot, both the jackpot probability of special symbols and the hit probability of normal symbols are in a high probability state. After the "probability variation A" corresponding to the "variable state" and the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the special symbol jackpot probability becomes a high probability state until the next big win, while the special symbol dynamic display is performed 100 times. Until then, "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability of hitting the normal pattern is high probability, and after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the probability of the special pattern is a high probability state. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal pattern is low probability state "Latent probability change A" corresponding to the "latency probability change state" and the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds after the jackpot, the special pattern jackpot probability is in a low probability state However, until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times, the probability of winning the normal pattern is high. After the jackpot, there is a "passing A" in which both the jackpot probability of special symbols and the hit probability of normal symbols are in a low probability state.

The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected based on the presence or absence of reaching the limit and the gaming state at the time the jackpot occurs are different. On the other hand, values that can be taken by the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type are associated.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8, before reaching the limit, and when the first special pattern jackpot occurs in the "normal game state", the jackpot for "probability variation A" The value "0 to 9" of the type counter C2 is associated, the value "10 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation B", and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latency probability variation A". The value of "30 to 89" is associated, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "90 to 99" is associated with "time saving A". Also, before the limit is reached, and if the first special pattern jackpot occurs in the "latency probability fluctuation state" (similar to "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state"), to "probability variation A" In contrast, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 9" is associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "10 to 19" is associated with "probability variation B", and the jackpot is associated with "latency probability variation A". The value "20 to 89" of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value "90 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A".

That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol in the "normal game state" before the limit is reached, the big hit random number counter stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the value of C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table. 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variable A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "25", the jackpot type is " If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "43", the "latent probability variable A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", it is set as the jackpot type. "Time reduction A" is determined.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" before the limit is reached, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is the special figure 1 jackpot type. Determined from the table 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "12", as the jackpot type If "probability variation B" is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "25", "latent probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "Time saving A" is determined as.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before the limit is reached, the jackpot type of "variable probability A" is 10%, and the jackpot type of "variable probability B" is 20%. , The jackpot type of “latency probability change A” will be 60%, and the jackpot type of “time reduction A” will be elected at a rate of 10%. Also, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot is won by dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of "variable A" is 10%, and the jackpot type of "variable B" is 10%, 70% of the jackpot type of “latency probability change A”, and 10% of the jackpot type of “time reduction A” will be elected.

Therefore, in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state" before the limit is reached, the selection ratios of the jackpot types "probability variation A" and "time reduction A" are the same (both 10%), but the "normal game state” is more likely to select the jackpot type “variable probability B” than the “latency probability fluctuation state” (20% > 10%), and the jackpot type “latent probability variation A” is less likely to be selected (60% < 70%). ing. As a game state, the "latent probability variable state" with the winning assist function is more advantageous for the player than the "latency probability variable state" without the winning assist function. is more likely to generate a special symbol jackpot than in the "normal game state", while the "normal game state" is more advantageous to the player than the "latency probability fluctuation state" so that the type of jackpot is selected. .

Then, in the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 shown in FIG. Even in the state, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 89" is associated with "rush A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "90 to 99" corresponds to "time saving A". attached.

That is, in the lottery for the first special symbols in all game states when the limit is reached, the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area 203d. When the value of is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "rush A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type is " Time reduction A" is determined.

Therefore, in all game states, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the limit is reached, the jackpot type of "Push through A" is 90%, the jackpot type of "Time reduction A" is 10%, will be elected at a ratio of

Therefore, before reaching the limit, the jackpot type that generates a high probability state of the special symbol in the winning lottery of the first special symbol (that is, the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B" and "latent probability variable A") reaches the limit. Sometimes, it is configured to be replaced with a jackpot type that generates a low probability state of special symbols and normal patterns (that is, jackpot type "rush A"). Therefore, in a situation where the limit is reached when the next big hit occurs, a state in which a left-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state") ), even if the jackpot is won, there is a high possibility that the state will be shifted to the “normal game state”, and a disadvantageous (lower advantage; the same shall apply hereinafter) game result for the player is likely to be derived. It has become.

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. When a jackpot occurs, the value "0 to 89" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation A", and the value "90 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to "time saving A". attached.

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all game states including the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" before the limit is reached, the jackpot in one of the second reserved ball storage areas 203e. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the random number counter storage area 203e1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, it corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area. The attached jackpot type is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variable A" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", "time saving A" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, in all game states including the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state", when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before the limit is reached, the "probability variation A" jackpot type is 90. %, and 10% for the jackpot type of “time saving A”.

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" before the limit is reached, the selection ratio of the jackpot type "variable probability A" in the second special symbol is configured to be the same (both 90%), and the jackpot type " Shortening of working hours A” is also configured to have the same selection rate (both 10%). As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" before the limit is reached, a large amount of game value is awarded (that is, a jackpot of 16 rounds), and the game state after the jackpot state continues until the next jackpot. A game state is entered in which the jackpot type “probability variable A”, which is the jackpot for which the auxiliary function is activated, is likely to be granted.

Then, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 9, when the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs at the time of reaching the limit, any game state including "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" Even so, the value "0 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A".

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all gaming states when the limit is reached, the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. When the value of is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area is the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. , and regardless of the value of the jackpot type counter C2, "time reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, in all game states including "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the limit is reached, the "time reduction A" jackpot type is 100% will be elected at a ratio of

Therefore, the jackpot type that generates a high probability state of the special pattern in the winning lottery of the second special pattern before reaching the limit (that is, the jackpot type "probability variation A") generates only the high probability state of the normal pattern when the limit is reached. It is configured to be replaced with a jackpot type (that is, a jackpot type “time saving A”). Therefore, in the situation that the limit is reached when the next big win occurs, the state of executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol by performing the right-handed game (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") In the case of , when the jackpot is won, at least it shifts to the "time reduction state", so when the limit is reached, it is better to win the jackpot in the second special pattern than to win the jackpot in the first special pattern. The result is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the limit is reached, the game result depends on whether the player stays in the game state of playing the right-handed game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the so-called "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation state" in which the execution of the left-handed game is encouraged, since the winning auxiliary function is not activated, the right-handed game It is easier to enter the ball into the first start port 64a by playing a left-handed game than to enter the ball into the second start port 64b by performing the above. Therefore, in the "normal game state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state", the player is configured to play a left-handed game and execute a game based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured so that a game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol can also be executed by performing a right-handed game. In addition, in the so-called "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which the execution of the right-handed game is encouraged, the winning auxiliary function is activated, so the left-handed game is performed and the ball is placed in the first start port 64a. It is easier to win a ball into the second starting port 64b by playing a right-handed game than to win a prize. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", the player is configured to be able to execute the game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol by performing the right-handed game, but the left-handed It is configured to be able to execute a game based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol by performing a beating game. Therefore, in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with each gaming state in order to correspond to the above event.

Here, referring to FIG. 10, the game mode (firing mode) in the game state in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the transition of the game state based on each jackpot type won in each game state (so-called game flow). FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a game flow based on winning a jackpot or the like in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 10 shows the transition of the game state based on the firing mode that is encouraged in each game state, and the firing mode that is not encouraged in each game state (for example, the left-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" The transition of the game state based on the variation effect of the first special symbol by) is an irregular case, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with four game states: "normal game state", "latency probability change state", "probability change state" and "time reduction state". In the game state in which the player stays, the player shoots a ball to the winning openings 64a, 64b that can win or is likely to win, and when the ball enters either of the winning openings 64a, 64b. The game is played while paying attention to whether or not a big win occurs in the dynamic display of the executed special symbols.

In the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, first, a game is started in the "normal game state". In this "normal game state", the probability of the big win of the special symbols is low, and it is difficult for the big win to occur. In addition, in the "normal game state", the prize winning assist function is not activated (so-called electric sapo no state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b. Therefore, in the "normal game state", the player performs a left-handed game and shoots a ball toward the first starting port 64a, aiming to generate a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. play a game. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a and a big win occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game state to be shifted to is determined according to the big win type.

Here, in the "normal game state", if the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won before the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning auxiliary function operates until the next jackpot "Probability fluctuation state ”. In addition, if the jackpot type "probability variable B" is won before the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning auxiliary function is activated until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. It shifts to the "probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, if the jackpot type ``latency probability variable A'' is won before the limit is reached, after going through the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the game shifts to the ``latency probability variable state''. In addition, if the jackpot type "time saving A" is won before reaching the limit or when the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. It shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the auxiliary function is activated. In addition, when the jackpot type "passing A" is won when the limit is reached, the "normal game state" is entered again after the jackpot state based on the jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in each jackpot state based on the dynamic display of special symbols, execution of the dynamic display of special symbols is prohibited, and the execution is suspended. The variable display of the pattern becomes executable. In this state, the winning probability of normal symbols and the operation mode of the normal electric player 64c are configured to be in a state equivalent to the "normal game state" (that is, a low probability state and a non-open extended state). .

Next, when the transition is made to the "latency probability fluctuation state", in the "latency probability fluctuation state", as in the "normal game state", the winning assist function is not activated (so-called no power supply state). It is in a state where it is difficult to let the ball enter the starting port 64b. On the other hand, in the "latent probability variable state", the probability of a big win with special symbols is high, and the state is such that a big win is more likely to occur than in the "normal game state". Therefore, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the player performs a left-handed game and shoots a ball toward the first start port 64a, as in the "normal game state", and the first special symbol dynamic A game is played with the aim of generating a big win in the display. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a and a big win occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the win, the destination game state is determined according to the big win type.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the "latency probability fluctuating state" is configured such that an effect equivalent to that of the "normal game state" is performed. Specifically, for example, the jackpot mode of the variable production that triggered the transition (jackpot type "probability change A" or "probability change B", jackpot type "latent probability change A" or "passing A", or jackpot type "probability change B" or "time saving A" jackpot pattern, etc.), production during the jackpot state, or the mode of variation production during stay, etc. content is executed. By configuring in this way, it is made difficult for the player to determine whether the game is being played in the ``latency probability fluctuation state'' or in the ``normal game state'', and it is difficult to determine which game state is being played. We are trying to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that makes us guess.

Here, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot type "variable probability A" is won before the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning auxiliary function operates until the next jackpot "probability fluctuation state”. In addition, if the jackpot type "probability variable B" is won before the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning auxiliary function is activated until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. It shifts to the "probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, if the jackpot type ``latency probability variable A'' is won before the limit is reached, after going through the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the ``latency probability variable state'' is entered again. In addition, if the jackpot type "time saving A" is won before reaching the limit or when reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times, the winning assistance Shifts to a "time reduction state" in which the function is activated. Furthermore, when the jackpot type ``passing A'' is won when the limit is reached, the state shifts to the ``normal game state'' after the jackpot state based on the jackpot.

Next, when the transition is made to the "time shortening state", in the "time shortening state", the jackpot probability of the special symbols is in a low probability state, which is the same as in the "normal game state". On the other hand, in the "shortened time state", the prize-winning auxiliary function is in operation (so-called power supply state) from the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed 100 times, and the normal symbols are variable. Winning a win on the display makes it easy to let the ball enter the second starting port 64b. Therefore, during the "time shortening state", the player plays a right-handed game and shoots balls toward the through gate 67 and the second starting port 64b, and wins a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. A game is played with the aim of generating it. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b and a big win occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning, the destination game state is determined according to the big win type.

Here, in the "time reduction state", if the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won before the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning auxiliary function operates until the next jackpot "Probability fluctuation state ”. In addition, if the jackpot type "time saving A" is won before reaching the limit or when reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times, the winning assistance Remain in a "time-saving state" in which the function is activated.

That is, in the "time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is recommended, as long as the right-handed game is played, the jackpot type "latent probability variable A" is not selected based on the winning to the second start port 64b. It is constructed so as not to shift from ``time reduction state'' to ``latency probability fluctuation state'' when winning a jackpot with 2 special symbols. Similarly, in the "time shortening state", as long as the right-handed game is played, the jackpot type "piercing A" is not selected based on the winning to the second start port 64b, so the second special symbol jackpot It is configured not to shift from "time reduction state" to "normal game state" when winning. Therefore, if the second special symbol jackpot is won in the "time shortened state", the jackpot type with the winning auxiliary function is won regardless of whether the limit is reached or when the limit is reached. It is configured to shift to a game state equivalent to or superior to the "shortened state" (jackpot probability of special symbols is low probability state → high probability state). Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the "time shortening state", the right-handed game is continued including the jackpot state without shifting to a game state more disadvantageous (lower in advantage) than the "time shortening state". can be executed.

In addition, in the "time reduction state", since the jackpot type "probability variation B" is not selected based on the winning of the second start port 64b, when winning the jackpot that generates the "probability variation state", The type of jackpot is “probability variable A”, that is, “probability variable state” in which the winning auxiliary function operates until the next jackpot. Therefore, in the "time shortening state", a game property is created as to how the "probability fluctuation state" occurs and the jackpot is won. Therefore, for example, even if the limiter is activated during the continuation of the "probability fluctuation state" to enter the "time reduction state", during the "time reduction state", the right-handed game again is executed (continued) (that is, the jackpot type "probability variation A") is won (so-called pullback), the jackpot limiter (number of times limit) is initialized, and the prize is won until the next jackpot. Auxiliary functions are activated. Then, when the "probability fluctuation state", which is a high probability state of special symbols, is reached, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is possible to continue the jackpot type "probability variable A" up to the limit number of jackpots, It is possible to increase the game value that can be imparted by the pullback. As a result, the player's desire to play the game in the "shortened time state" can be stimulated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time shortening state" is such that the dynamic display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) without the occurrence of a big win. In the case (so-called electric sapo end), the operation of the winning auxiliary function is stopped (finished), the game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is a low probability state and does not have the winning auxiliary function, that is, the "normal game state" Move to In this case, since the winning assist function does not work, the player is suggested to execute a left-handed game, and the right-handed game is changed to a left-handed game.

Next, when the transition to the "probability fluctuation state" occurs, in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the special pattern jackpot probability becomes a high probability state, and the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state" ”It is in a state where a big hit is more likely to occur. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state", the winning auxiliary function is operating (so-called electric sapo state), and by winning the winning with the variable display of the normal pattern, the second start It is in a state where it is easy to let the ball enter the mouth 64b. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuating state", the player plays a right-handed game and shoots the ball toward the through gate 67 and the second starting port 64b, and generates a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The game is played with the aim of making When a ball enters the second starting port 64b and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning, the destination game state is determined according to the big win type.

Here, in the "probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot type "variable probability A" is won before the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning auxiliary function will operate until the next jackpot. state of change”. In addition, if the jackpot type "time saving A" is won before reaching the limit or when the limit is reached, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. It shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the auxiliary function is activated.

That is, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is recommended, as in the "time shortening state", the jackpot type "latency probability change A" is not selected based on the winning of the second start port 64b. It is configured not to shift from "probability fluctuation state" to "latency probability fluctuation state" when winning. Similarly, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the jackpot type "passing A" is not selected based on the winning to the second start port 64b, when the jackpot is won, the "probability fluctuation state" → "normal game state ” is configured not to migrate to Therefore, when the second special pattern jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type with the winning auxiliary function is won in any case before the limit is reached or when the limit is reached, so the jackpot state It is possible to continuously execute the right-handed game including.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", as long as the right-handed game is played, the jackpot type "probability variable B" is not selected based on the winning to the second start port 64b, so the jackpot of the second special symbol is won. ``Probability fluctuation state'' in which the winning assistance function is activated until the next big hit → → ``Probability fluctuation state'' in which the winning assistance function is activated until the dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times” It is That is, in the "probability fluctuation state", if a jackpot type in which the "probability fluctuation state" occurs again is won, the winning auxiliary function always wins the jackpot type that continues until the next jackpot, so the current "probability fluctuation It is configured to shift (maintain) to a game state equivalent to "state". Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", a game effect is created as to how to win the jackpot in which the "probability fluctuation state" occurs again before the limiter is activated. Therefore, it is possible to drive the player's willingness to play in the "probability fluctuation state" and improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability fluctuation state" having a limit on the number of winning assist functions, that is, the "probability fluctuation state" triggered by the jackpot type "variable probability B" is equivalent to the "time reduction state" It is configured so that the production of Specifically, for example, the jackpot aspect of the variable production that triggered the transition (jackpot pattern, etc.), the production during the jackpot state, or the aspect of the variable production after the jackpot ends, etc. Equivalent or substantially equivalent contents are executed in the "probability change state" and the "time reduction state" as triggers. By configuring in this way, at least while the dynamic display of the (second) special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the player is told whether the game is being played in the "probability fluctuation state" or in the "time reduction state". To make it difficult to determine whether a game is being played or not, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess which game state it is in, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" having a limit on the number of times of the winning auxiliary function, that is, the "probability fluctuation state" triggered by the jackpot type "probability change B" is the dynamic display of special symbols without the occurrence of a jackpot. When the target display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) (so-called electric support end), the operation of the winning auxiliary function stops (ends), and the probability of a special symbol jackpot is in a high probability state. It shifts to a game state that does not have a win assist function, that is, to a "latency probability change state". In this case, since the winning assist function does not work, the player is suggested to execute a left-handed game, and the right-handed game is changed to a left-handed game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the "probability fluctuation state" and the "shortened time state", or the "latency probability fluctuation state" and the "normal game state". Sometimes. By configuring in this way, for example, the player is asked whether the jackpot type "time saving A" is won due to the activation of the limiter, or the jackpot type "probability variable B" is won before the limiter is reached, or whether the limiter is It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the winning of the jackpot type ``passing through A'' or the winning of the jackpot type ``latent probability variable A'' before reaching the limiter is achieved by the actuation. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the limiter has been reached, creating a game property that makes the player guess whether or not the limit has been reached, increasing the desire to continue playing the game, and improving the interest in the game. I am planning.

The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Moreover, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. Specifically, a "non-reach (long)" production mode or a "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and only the variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" is executed " "Normal Reach" effect mode, "Super Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed and the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, and similarly, the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed into "Special Reach". , and the "Special Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of " is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode) Then, the "non-reach" production mode may be referred to) is a third pattern display device 81 in which three pattern rows (not shown) fluctuate as a special pattern variation production, each pattern row After performing a variable element of ``high-speed variation'' for shuffling at high speed, the same 3rd pattern does not stop in 2 pattern rows that stop first, and ``ready-to-win display'' does not occur.

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" means, for example, that in the variation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row moves downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a high speed. A moving element that is scrolled to In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed except for a specific production mode ("non-reach (short)" production mode). It is configured to be

The "low speed variation" variable element means that, in the third symbol variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the "high speed variation" variable element, the third symbol is displayed at a speed that is visible to the player. A moving element that scrolls to In this "low-speed variation" variable element, each symbol row is stopped and displayed in order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. When the same third symbol stops in the two symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row) that are stopped and displayed first, it is considered that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and develops into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol rows to be stop-displayed first, the rest of the symbol rows are stop-displayed to end the variable performance. Details of each variable element including the variable element of "high-speed variation" or the variable element of "low-speed variation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and each symbol sequence stops in order and stops first. A different third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows to be played, the remaining one pattern row is stopped, and one variation performance is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is completed, each symbol row is displayed at the same time. Stop, 2 symbol rows (for example, 2 symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), different 3rd symbols stop, other symbol rows stop, 1 variation The performance ends.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode is that, in the variation production of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, immediately after the same third pattern stops in the two pattern rows that are stopped and displayed first, " This is one of the production modes of the "ready-to-reach display" in which the variable elements of "normal reach" are executed and other "ready-to-reach display" does not develop into the variable elements of "super reach" and "special reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64a, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting hole 64a It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first storage area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting port 64b It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second storage area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (number of pending balls) The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Also, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number table 202c on hold provided in the ROM202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variable effect, is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether or not a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variable effect, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variable state", "latency probability variable state", or "time reduction state". Or, it is for changing the selection ratio of the effect mode depending on whether it is in the "normal game state" and (3) how many reserved balls of the variable effect are reserved.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" performance mode, the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, and the "special reach" performance, are used when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost. The degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode by configuring the mode selection ratio to be different. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode that makes it easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired result of the lottery is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. Based on, it is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed in the variable performance, and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case that the variable performance is on, a big win is hardly generated by the variable performance, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as the second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible useless balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on balls entering the second start port 64b in the state of reaching .

Specifically, the number of standby times for the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and since the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability In the game state in which the balls are likely to enter the second starting port 64b in the "fluctuation state", the "latency probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the second start port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the second start port The lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired even though the ball is entered into 64b. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64a, and the variable effect is terminated, and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the balls. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol) is easily reached, and the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged to be a machine with which it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the game will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a variation performance based on the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, whether the variation performance is appropriate, Based on the game state at that time and the total number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at that time, the number of reservations table 202c is referred to, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected. is configured to Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the reservation number table 202c in FIG. 11, the total number of reservation balls is "1 ~ 3", or when the total number of pending balls is "1" at the time of extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which a right-handed game is performed, the stop pattern table 202d A table 202d1 (see FIG. 12(a)) is selected.

In addition, if the number of retained balls is "4 to 8" at the time of extraction of "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" in which left-handed games are performed, or "right-handed games are performed" At the time of extracting the loss of "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of retained balls is "2 to 8", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 12(b)) is selected.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, any game state (that is, "normal game state", "latency probability change state", "probability change state" or "time reduction state") and any number of retained balls (that is, 1 to 8), the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 12(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

That is, when any one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when there is no (that is, at the time of loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of held balls and the game state at that time.

It should be noted that the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a jackpot is won. For example, when a big hit is won and the number of pending balls is large, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected It may be configured to allow selection of the "Special Reach" effect mode, etc.).

In this case, in each performance mode in which 'ready-to-reach display' is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the variable element part of 'high-speed fluctuation' is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation production is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds ends (when the variable element of the "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the rendering mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" rendering mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 12(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, on the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a comparatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable production being held. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (short)" effect mode with a short variable effect time is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Also, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode A "non-reach (long)" presentation mode with a long variable presentation time is selected. As a result, since the "non-reach (long)" effect mode with a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b can be performed. It becomes easy to secure the ball entry time to the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new start winning will occur during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation where the variable performance is executed. can be maintained.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of holding balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64a Alternatively, the determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entry are performed so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. is configured to

Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance, but the A table 202d1 and B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is the same, and the value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the other effect mode is the same. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if the pre-reading notice is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, the effect that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice in the variable performance that is the target of the pre-reading notice. can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”. Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, each "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set to 5% for the "normal reach" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach" effect mode.

Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of “special reach” production mode > “super reach” production mode > “normal reach” production mode, and in the fluctuation production at the time of losing, “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode > "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player according to the type of performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the state in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held in the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on, it is possible to select a performance mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing the pre-reading notice, the number of pending balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading notice and the pre-reading notice It may differ from the number of held balls at the time of execution of the variable production. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 22). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a, the first reserve first to fourth areas provided in the first reserve ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first start port 64a It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 64b, the second reserve first to fourth areas provided in the second reserve ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second start port 64b It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determining fluctuation patterns. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. This pachinko machine 10 has a variation pattern table 202e for special figure 1 loss, which is commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol is lost, and a variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss when the first special symbol is lost. A special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is commonly used in all game states, and a special figure 2 loss variation that is commonly used in all game states when the second special symbol is lost A pattern table 202e3 and a variation pattern table 202e4 for a special figure 2 jackpot that is commonly used in all game states at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol are prepared.

FIG. 13(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e2, FIG. 14 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss stored in the ROM 202, FIG. 14(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 stored in the ROM 202. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" and "non-reach (short)" are referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined. "E1: non-reach (short)" referred to when the mode is determined, "E2: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and "super reach" performance mode are divided into "E3: Super reach" which is referred to when is determined, and "E4: Special reach" which is referred to when the "Special reach" effect mode is determined. In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E5: Normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: Super reach" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined It is divided into "E7: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), that is, If the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that point and the number of balls held at that point by referring to the holding number table 202c, and the same holding area. and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area was reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high-speed variation", the variable element of "low-speed variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" Variables and "Revary" variables are provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is, as described above, a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (short)" production mode or the like is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). ), and when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, "10 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed change (long)"). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds" or "10 seconds" is executed, and the third pattern is scrolled to make it visible and "ready-to-win display" is generated. It is a variable element that shows whether or not to do it. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected, and production modes other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode (for example, "non-reach (long) )” presentation mode) is selected, it is performed for “5 seconds” after the variable element of “high-speed variation”.

That is, in the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the final stop symbol row (in the first embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (Fig. 4)) stops while decelerating, while in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, each symbol row of the third symbol display device 81 changes to "low-speed variation is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop) without going through the variable elements of . In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the variable effect is completed as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "5 seconds".

The variation element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach formation symbol") in the two symbol rows that stop first in the variation element of "low speed variation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur depending on the result of the variation of the symbol row. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "slow variation" variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the "super reach" A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The variation element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variation element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a special effect (for example, "competition effect") different from the predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" suddenly develops without going through the variable element of "normal reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "5 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If you go to , there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variation element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the big hit variation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see FIGS. 13(b) and 14(b)), and the loss variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3 (see FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. 14(a)) is configured not to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, which is referred to when the first special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach (long)" has a total variation time of "15 One fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of "variation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'low-speed fluctuation'" of "seconds" (variation time). It is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time" ) are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation "Variation element of '" is "0 to 9", and only "Variation element of 'High speed variation (long)' + Variation element of 'Low speed variation'" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 is All possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, ``E1: non-reach (short)'' has ``only ``high-speed variation (short)'' variation elements'' with an overall variation time of ``5 seconds''. There are two variation patterns.

In the example shown in FIG. 13(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "only the fluctuation element of "fast fluctuation (short)"" are set to "0 to 9", and only "only the variable element of 'high-speed variation (short)'" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, which is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol in any gaming state, the variation type counter CS1 is All possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" + One variation pattern of “Normal reach” variation element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all possible variations of the variation type counter CS1 “High-speed variation (long)” variation element+“Low-speed variation” variation element+“Normal reach” variation element are associated with the value (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: Super Reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "30 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 13(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, which is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all possible variations of the variation type counter CS1 "High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element are associated with the value ("0 to 9") of It is In other words, in the case of the "super reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Special reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "40 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, in any game state, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element are associated with the value ("0 to 9") of It is In other words, in the case of the "special reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "Variable element of 'special reach'" is selected.

It should be noted that the variation pattern at the time of losing the special figure 1 is determined as the variation pattern as it is in the effect mode, so the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although selection is performed using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used together for selection (selection of presence/absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the first special symbol is hit will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reservation ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, refer to the reservation number table 202c. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the above-mentioned stop pattern table are selected. 202d to select an effect mode. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: normal reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total variation time of "25 seconds" Two fluctuation patterns are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" Variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element" variation pattern is 30%, ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation It is set so that the fluctuation pattern of "element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with a total variation time of "30 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 13(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, in any game state, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" is selected. fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-fluctuation"" variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured to select a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'". Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "40 seconds" Element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 13(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "high speed variation (long)" is selected. variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element" variation pattern is 50%, ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variable element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation" "variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" "Variation element" variation pattern and ""High speed variation (long)" variation element + "Low speed variation" variation element + "Normal reach" variation element + "Super reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element ] are evenly selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

In this way, when a big win is won, a comparatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the performance contents of the variation performance in which a big win occurs, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the performance contents of the variation performance at the time of the loss and performing the variation performance. It can be digested efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss referred to when the second special symbol is lost will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the second reserve ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value for a jackpot, that is, it is a lost value. In this case, referring to the reserved number table 202c, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value of the counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area was reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the second special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach (long)" has an overall variation time of "8 One variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (short)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation'" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation "Variation element of '" is "0 to 9", and only "Variation element of 'High speed fluctuation (short)' + Variation element of 'Low speed fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol in any gaming state, the variation type counter CS1 is All possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation factor of “high-speed variation (short)”+variation factor of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "high-speed change (short)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E1: non-reach (short)" is 1 of "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "3 seconds" There are two variation patterns.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "only the fluctuation element of "fast fluctuation (short)"" are set to "0 to 9", and only "only the variable element of 'high-speed variation (short)'" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol in any gaming state, the variation type counter CS1 is All possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (short)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E2: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element with a total variation time of "13 seconds" + One variation pattern of “Normal reach” variation element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" set to be selectable.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all variations that the variation type counter CS1 can take “High-speed variation (short)” variation element+“Low-speed variation” variation element+“Normal reach” variation element are associated with the value (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: Super Reach" includes "high-speed variation (short)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "23 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", "high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + Only "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element" are associated with the value ("0 to 9") of ing. In other words, in the case of the "super reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E4: Special Reach" includes ""high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "33 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", "high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + Only "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Special Reach" variable elements are set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol in any gaming state, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element are associated with the value ("0 to 9") of It is In other words, in the case of the "special reach" production mode in the second special symbol fluctuation production, the fluctuation pattern is always ""high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "Variable element of 'special reach'" is selected.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation effect that is likely to be executed mainly during the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time shortening state" is compared with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation effect. It is configured so that a short time is selected, and the setting is such that the time efficiency of the game is high (good).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(b), the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 to be referred to at the time of the second special symbol jackpot will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, refer to the reservation number table 202c. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the above-mentioned stop pattern table are selected. 202d to select an effect mode. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E5: normal reach" includes ""high-speed variation (short)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of "18 seconds" Two fluctuation patterns are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element, ""High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (short)" Variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element" variation pattern is 30%, ""high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation It is set so that the fluctuation pattern of "element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 2 jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, the variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (short)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach'" is configured to be selected, so that the game can be played with time efficiency. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E6: Super reach" includes "variation element of" high speed variation (short) "with total variation time of "23 seconds" + variation of "low speed variation" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Short)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 14(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-fluctuation"" variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 2 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured to select a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (short)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'". Thus, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern while playing the game with good time efficiency.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E7: Special reach" includes "variation element of" high speed variation (short) "with total variation time of "33 seconds" + variation of "low speed variation" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Short)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 14(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol in any game state, "high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element" variation pattern is 50%, ""high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variable element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation" "variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 2 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" "Variation Element" variation pattern and ""High Speed Variation (Short)" Variation Element + "Low Speed Variation" Variation Element + "Normal Reach" Variation Element + "Special Reach" Variation Element + "Re-Variation" Variation Element ] are evenly selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern while the game is played with good time efficiency.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The random number counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Also, when the random number counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) It is updated once and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 22).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in one of the general map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the general map holding ball storage area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area, and the normal pattern per random number counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area. Hit judgment is performed on the value.

The value of the random number that is the winning pattern is set by a random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 1/100 in the low probability state, high probability 50/100 etc. in the state), and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern retention ball execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 will be the hit set by the random number table per normal pattern. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a hit. Then, a normal pattern variation table (not shown) is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set (for example, 30 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is not activated, 3 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is activated) etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, an electric role opening table (not shown) is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is not activated, 0.1 second when the winning auxiliary function is activated) 5 seconds, etc.), and during the opening time, the normal electric motor 64c operates to open, and during that time, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the counter C4 per general pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area does not match the value of the random number that is set by the random number table per general pattern (not shown), it is determined to be lost. be done. Then, according to the game state, a variable display time is set by referring to a normal pattern fluctuation table (not shown), and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal pattern display device 83, the stop pattern (normal pattern) is set to "X". ” is illuminated.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a probability variable flag 203g, and a limit counter 203h. , a round counter 203i, a winning counter 203j, a time saving counter 203k, and a time saving infinite flag 203m.

The first holding ball number counter 203a counts the number of balls entered into the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first The entry of the ball into the opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b may be referred to as "starting winning"), the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed at 81).

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 20) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64a is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 24 (see S303 of ). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S408 in FIG. 25).

The second reserved ball number counter 203b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, is the second starting port 64b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Suspension of dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation performance of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the start winning It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting times) up to four times.

As with the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 20). Then, every time the start winning to the second starting port 64b is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 24 (see S307 of ). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is executed (see S405 in FIG. 25).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the number of reserved balls command is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 (see S310 in FIG. 24). This pending ball count command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the first pending ball counter 203a or the second pending ball counter 203b is incremented by 1 after the start winning is detected. It is a command to be executed, and includes data regarding the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and data regarding the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the reserved ball number command. can. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, each time a starting winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp control device 113, dynamic display (variation) of each special symbol managed by the voice ramp control device 113 Even if the number of pending balls in the production) deviates from the number of pending balls in the actual dynamic display (variable production) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold The number of balls command can correct the deviation.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, in the pending ball number command, 1 is added to the first pending ball number counter 203a or the In addition to the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203b, the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) is generated in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is A number command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command are used to execute fluctuation effects based on the respective values. Before execution of the variable performance, it is determined what will happen to the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, execution of various effects is determined, and a "suspended change notice" that changes the suspended pattern (executed pattern) displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 is issued. The contents of the presentation, the timing of execution, and the like can be determined.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a pending ball number command indicating the pending ball number of the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like are separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the A command similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command (advance variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) based on the incoming ball may be generated and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64a. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64a (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the second start port 64b. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

The reserved ball execution area 203f, as described above, starts the execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as target display and variable effect setting.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Data ( counters C1-C3, CS1), if the data corresponding to the start winning regarding the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, it corresponds to one start winning of the data. Data is shifted into this hold ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start winning with respect to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning with respect to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol is the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not suspended. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, referring to FIG. 6 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set target display and variable effect.

As described above, for setting the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effect, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (start winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball enters one of the first starting ports 64a (start winning) is stored. Up to 4 times can be stored, but in that case, among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) data is stored in That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first starting port 64a that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (2nd reservation 1st to 4th areas). be. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the second starting port 64b that is older in terms of time is stored, and the second reserve first area stores the data to the second starting port 64b that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. there is

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. , the data stored in the second reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when the execution start timing of the variable effect comes, the MPU 201 stores no data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first reserved area, the data stored in the first reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the variation start process (see FIG. 26), and a big win lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is changed to the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the first reserved ball storage area 203e It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is changed to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. shift to Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the first holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the first holding ball storage area 203d stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. As described above, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, when a big win is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, reference is made for opening control of the big winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. A jackpot release table 202f is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 15, the jackpot release table 202f will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot release table 202f stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes) is stipulated.

The jackpot opening table 202f of the first embodiment is divided based on the jackpot type of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for "probability variation A" to be referred to when winning the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B" to be referred to when winning the jackpot type "probability variation B", and jackpot type For "latency probability change A" that is referred to when winning "latency probability change A", for "time reduction A" that is referred to when winning the jackpot type "time reduction A", and for the jackpot type "through A" The opening mode of the big winning opening 65a is changed for "Push through A" which is referred to when winning.

As shown in FIG. 15, the number of openings of the large winning opening 65a set when winning the jackpot type "probability variable A" is "16 times", and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the large winning opening 65a is It is defined to be "30 seconds", the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls into the big winning opening 65a is "15". .

In addition, the transition gaming state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "probability variation A" is "special pattern: high probability, normal pattern: high probability", and the winning auxiliary function operates until the next jackpot "probability fluctuation state ”.

Next, the number of openings of the big winning opening 65a set when winning the jackpot type "probability variable B" is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening one of the big winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is defined to be "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls into the big winning opening 65a is defined to be "15".

In addition, the transition game state after the jackpot by the jackpot type "probability variation B" is "special pattern: high probability, normal pattern: high probability", until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. During the period, it shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function is activated.

Next, the number of openings of the big winning opening 65a set when winning the jackpot type "latency probability variable A" is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening one of the big winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is defined to be "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls into the big winning opening 65a is defined to be "15".

In addition, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type “latency probability variable A” is “special pattern: high probability, normal pattern: low probability”, and “latency probability variable state” in which the winning auxiliary function does not operate. to move to.

Next, the number of openings of the large winning opening 65a set when winning the jackpot type "time saving A" is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the large winning opening 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is defined to be "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls into the big winning opening 65a is defined to be "15".

In addition, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "time reduction A" is "special pattern: low probability, normal pattern: high probability", until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. During the period, it shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the winning assistance function is activated.

Next, the number of openings of the big prize winning opening 65a set when winning the jackpot type "passing A" is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening one of the big winning prize openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is defined to be "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls into the big winning opening 65a is defined to be "15".

In addition, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "rush A" is "special pattern: low probability, normal pattern: low probability", to "normal game state" in which the prize assisting function does not operate. and migrate.

In this way, since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make a difference in the game value that is directly given according to the jackpot type that is won. In addition, by changing the game state to be shifted after the jackpot game for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make a difference in the game performance after the jackpot ends based on the jackpot type won. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbols, it is possible to create a playability of determining which jackpot type is won or not, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the mode of opening the big winning opening 65a based on the jackpot type (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls, and transition game state) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. be. Specifically, the number of opening times may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. you can Moreover, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types.

In addition, during the jackpot game, it is configured to temporarily transition (transition) to the "normal game state". By configuring in this way, during the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult to give a game value other than the opening of the jackpot 65a (for example, the long opening of the normal electric combination 64c). It is possible to calculate the ball output rate separately for the middle and the middle. As a result, it becomes easier to calculate the ball payout rate when designing the game specifications, and the man-hours for designing the game specifications can be reduced.

Furthermore, in one round of the jackpot game, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, in one round, after the opening of the big winning opening 65a is started, it is closed once in a predetermined number of seconds (for example, "5 seconds") less than the maximum opening time, and is closed for a predetermined closing time ( For example, after "1 second"), the large winning opening 65a is opened again, and may be closed again when the maximum opening time elapses or when the maximum winning number is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the jackpot game and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The variable probability flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbols are in a high probability state. The big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 7) referred to in the winning/losing lottery of the special symbols is configured to differ depending on whether or not the variable probability flag 203g is on. Specifically, in the winning lottery of special symbols, if the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, while referring to the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state based on the probability setting value, the probability variation flag 203g If it is set to ON, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is referred to based on the probability setting value.

This variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and at the end of the jackpot, the game state after the end of the jackpot is shifted to a high probability state of special symbols (that is, the jackpot type "variable probability A" , “Variable probability B” or “Variable latency A”), it is set to ON (see S552 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot, when the jackpot type that shifts the game state after the jackpot ends to the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "rush A") is elected, It is set to OFF (see S553 in FIG. 31).

After the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the initialization of the limit counter 203h (that is, 0 clearing), the limit counter 203h has reached a predetermined number of special symbol jackpots (6 times in the first embodiment). It is a counter for counting whether or not. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, every time the number of special symbol jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (six times in the first embodiment), A limiter function is installed to always shift the game state after the end of the jackpot when reaching a predetermined number of times to the low probability state of the special symbols and prohibit the shift to the high probability state of the special symbols. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to refer to the value of the limit counter 203h in order to count the predetermined number of times.

The limit counter 203h is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then incremented by 1 each time a special symbol jackpot occurs (see S471 in FIG. 27). Then, when the value of the limit counter 203h is no longer smaller than "6", that is, when the value of the limit counter 203h becomes "6" or more, a predetermined number of big hits occur and a predetermined number of hits occur. The value of the limit counter 203h is initialized (that is, cleared to 0) when it is determined that the limit number of times has been reached (see S561 in FIG. 31).

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 confirms the value of the limit counter 203h when the special symbol jackpot is won, and if the value of the limit counter 203h is smaller than "6", the special symbol 1 jackpot type is selected based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2 from among the jackpot types including the jackpot types that can shift to the high probability state. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203h is not less than "6", i.e., if it is equal to or greater than "6", the jackpot type that does not include the jackpot type that can shift to the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot type One jackpot type is selected based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2. By configuring in this way, every time the number of times of the big win reaches the predetermined number of times, the game state after the end of the big win can always be shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the high probability state of the special pattern continues to be continued to suppress the occurrence of an excessive jackpot ``running game'', and the balls are obtained when the player continuously plays the game in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加The rate can be leveled, and a configuration can be made so that the game value given to the player does not become too high.

Every time the value of the limit counter 203h is updated (including 0 clear), a limit number command or a limit clear command is sent to the voice ramp control device 113, and the voice ramp control device 113 side also receives the special symbol jackpot count and limit. It is configured so that the initialization of the number of times can be grasped. Also, the audio lamp control device 113 that receives the limit count command or the limit clear command transmitted from the main control device 110 is configured to update the value of a sub-limit counter 223e (see FIG. 16), which will be described later.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured not to notify the player that the number of jackpots has reached the limit number of times, and even before the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times, the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times. It is configured so that a jackpot type that can be selected when the number of times is reached (that is, a jackpot type “time reduction A” or “pierce A”) can be selected. That is, it is configured such that it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the number of times of the big win has reached the limit. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so as not to notify the player of the remaining limit number of jackpots. That is, it is configured so that the player can hardly determine the number of remaining big wins until reaching the limit number of big wins.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot reaches the limit number of times, the jackpot type (that is, "time saving A" or "rushing A" that cannot forcibly generate the "probability fluctuation state") ), until the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times, the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" (that is, "variable probability A", "variable probability B" or "latent probability variable A ”), the remaining limit number of jackpots is the maximum immediately after reaching the limit number of jackpots. When a game is played in this state, when a jackpot type that generates a 'probability fluctuation state' is won, the number of winning times of the jackpot type that generates a 'probability fluctuation state' is maximized (that is, five times). On the other hand, at a timing other than immediately after reaching the limit number of jackpots, that is, after reaching the limit number of jackpots and winning at least one or more jackpots, the remaining limit number of jackpots is not the maximum and the jackpot is won. Immediately after reaching the limit number of times, the number of winning times of the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" decreases. Therefore, at the time of selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing the game, the player who recognizes that the timing is other than immediately after reaching the limit number of times of the big win judges that the game value to be obtained is decreasing, and the pachinko machine. 10, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

Therefore, it is configured not to inform the player that the number of jackpots has reached the limit number of times, and a jackpot type that can be selected when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times even before the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times (that is, a jackpot type 'Saving time A' or 'rushing A') can be selected so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the maximum number of times of big wins has been reached. In addition, the player is not notified of the remaining limit number of times of big wins, and is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of times of big wins until reaching the limit number of times of big wins. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is immediately after reaching the jackpot limit number of times or not, and whether the jackpot remaining limit number of times is reached, and the timing is not immediately after reaching the jackpot limit number of times. Even so, it is difficult for the pachinko machine 10 to shy away from the game, and the decrease in the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

The round counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of times the big winning opening 65a is opened in the big win. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of openings of the big winning opening 65a during the big winning state is different for each big winning type. The value of counter 203i is set. Then, the MPU 201 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a at the time of the big win based on the set value of the round counter 203i.

The value of the round counter 203i is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Specifically, when winning the jackpot type “probability variable A” which is a jackpot of 16 rounds, the value of the round counter 203i is set to “16” (see S505 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "probability variation B", "latency probability variation B", "time saving A" or "passing A") is won, the value of the round counter 203i "4" is set (see S506 in FIG. 28).

In the jackpot state, the MPU 201 satisfies the conditions for closing the large winning opening 65a (in the first embodiment, either 30 seconds have elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening 65a, or 10 balls have won in the large winning opening 65a). If so, the value of this round counter 203i is decremented by one. If the decremented value of the round counter 203i is greater than "0", the big winning state is continued, and if the decremented value of the round counter 203i is not greater than "0", the big winning state is terminated. ing.

The prize winning counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a while the big winning hole 65a is open in the big win state. The MPU 201 is configured to determine the number of winning balls into the large winning opening 65a, which is one of the conditions for closing the large winning opening 65a, based on the value of the winning counter 203j.

The value of the prize winning counter 203j is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to "10" at the timing (opening time elapses or interval time elapses) when the big prize winning port 65a is opened in the jackpot state. (See S523 in FIG. 29). When the ball is detected (turned on) by a large winning opening switch (not shown) provided in the large winning opening 65a while the large winning opening 65a is open, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter 203j. (See S534 in FIG. 30).

The MPU 201 determines whether or not the subtracted value of the winning counter 203j is greater than "0". 10 balls are not entered, and the condition for closing the big prize opening 65a based on the number of winning prizes is not satisfied, and the big prize opening 65a is kept open. On the other hand, if the subtracted value of the winning counter 203j is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the winning counter 203j is "0" or less, 10 or more balls enter the big winning opening 65a. , it is determined that the condition for closing the large winning opening 65a based on the number of winnings is satisfied, and the large winning opening 65a is closed.

The time saving counter 203k counts the number of executions of special symbols after the end of the jackpot, and the winning auxiliary function to the second start port 64b in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" (that is, the high probability of normal symbols state, etc.) to determine whether or not to operate. Based on the value of the time saving counter 203k, the MPU 201 determines whether or not to operate the winning auxiliary function to the second starting port 64b, and determines the variable display of normal symbols and the operation mode of the normal electric 64c. is configured to

The value of this time-saving counter 203k is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the big win ends, the value is set based on the big win type that generated the big win. Specifically, if the jackpot is based on the jackpot type "probability variable B" or "time saving A", the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to "100" at the end of the jackpot (see S555 in FIG. 31) ), in the case of a jackpot based on other jackpot types (that is, jackpot types “probability variation A”, “latent probability variation A” or “rushing A”), the value of the time-saving counter 203k after the end of the jackpot is cleared to "0" (see S556 in FIG. 31). Also, when the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0", the value of the time saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed once (see S418 in FIG. 25). .

The time-saving infinite flag 203m is a flag for determining whether or not to operate the winning assist function to the second starting port 64b after the end of the big win until the next big win occurs. The MPU 201 determines whether or not to operate the winning auxiliary function to the second starting port 64b based on the setting status of the time-saving infinite flag 203m, and determines the variable display of normal symbols and the operation mode of the normal electric 64c. is configured to

This time-saving infinite flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the jackpot ends, it is set to ON when the jackpot type that generated the jackpot is "variable probability A" (Fig. 31 S558 reference), is set to OFF when it is a jackpot type other than "probability variation A" (see S559 of FIG. 31).

MPU201, when the value of the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than "0", or when the time saving infinite flag 203m is set to ON, the second start in "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" A prize winning assisting function to the mouth 64b is operated, the variable display time of the normal symbols caused by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed in a shorter time than the "normal game state", and the variable display of the normal symbols is won. Probability is set to a high probability state. Then, when a win is won in the variable display of normal symbols, the normal electric combination 64c is driven to be open for a longer time than the "normal game state", and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the second starting port. Make it easier to win 64b. In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes "0", the operation of the winning auxiliary function is stopped. If you do, the game state shifts to the "latency probability change state".

The input/output port 205 includes, on the input side, switches for detecting balls that have won prizes in the prize winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a and balls guided to the ball discharge path through the out opening 66, respectively. Various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors, etc., a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a setting for updating the probability setting value by being pressed in the "setting change mode". A change switch 502 and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. In addition, the input/output port 205 has various solenoids 209 such as a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), etc., a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol reservation lamp 84, a confirmation setting, etc. A probability display device 504 is connected for displaying the values. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 at intervals of about 0.6 seconds.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like. Details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 will be described later.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the first embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and displays the third pattern on the display control device 114 based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is changed, It controls the continuous announcement effect.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

A detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a setting suggestion lottery At least a table 222e and a suggestion lottery table 222f are stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, and the effect contents (and the execution time (timing)) is determined and control is executed.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 is the limit number of times of the jackpot number transmitted by the limit number command etc. transmitted by the main controller 110, the set probability value transmitted by the setting value command , a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f, which will be described later, and a retraction counter 223h, which will also be described later. The content (type and timing) of the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to be selected by lottery. Details of the setting suggestion lottery table 222e and the suggestion content lottery table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 contains a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub first reserved ball counter 223b, a sub second reserved ball counter 223c, a set value memory 223d, a sub limit counter 223e, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f, and a disadvantageous hit flag 223g (hereinafter referred to as A low advantage for a player or a low gaming value may be referred to as a “disadvantage.” In the following explanation, the expression “disadvantage” does not mean that the player suffers a disadvantage. It means that the advantage is low or the game value is low.), a pullback counter 223h, a suggestion content lottery counter 223i, a setting suggestion content memory 223j, a jackpot effect flag 223k, a sub-round counter 223m, and an ending flag 223n. , a first pending information storage area 223o, a second pending information storing area 223p, and an execution information storing area 223q are provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 35). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed (see S1402 in FIG. 39).

The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is triggered by the turn-on of the fluctuation start flag 223a, and when there is a variable performance during standby, a variable performance setting process for executing the variable performance during standby. (See S1402 to S1413 in FIG. 39).

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a first special symbol variation effect ( dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command (holding ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first pending ball number counter 223b It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first starting port 64a, and the main controller 110 changes the number of the first reserved balls counter 203a. When the pending ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the value ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1211 in FIG. 35).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main controller 110. And when receiving the stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 along with those receptions, subtract 1 from the value of the sub first pending ball number counter 223b ( update) (see S1406 in FIG. 39). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b. While synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated.

Similar to the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, the sub second reserved ball counter 223c is a second special symbol variation effect ( dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command sent from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c. It's becoming

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls for the second special symbol variation effect by entering the second starting port 64b, and the main controller 110 counts the second pending ball number counter 203b. When the pending ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the value ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 35).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted in the main controller 110. And when receiving the stop type command and setting the aspect of the second special symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 along with their reception, subtract 1 from the value of the sub second pending ball number counter 223c ( update) (see S1409 in FIG. 39). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. While synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (FIG. 35), at the timing of updating the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command (S1406 of FIG. 39 or S1409), in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c after being stored or updated, the display control device 114 issues a display reserved ball number command. Send to

When the display control device 114 receives this display-purpose reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are displayed. An image is drawn so that the reserved symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c and the execution symbols indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4B) of the third symbol display device 81. to control.

As described above, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also determined by the first pending ball counter 203a and the second pending ball counter 203a of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of 203b. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The setting value memory 223d is a memory for storing (storing) data on the probability setting value set in the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The audio ramp controller 113 can recognize the probability set value set by the main controller 110 by determining the value of the set value memory 223d.

This setting value memory 223d receives a setting value command indicating a probability setting value from the main controller 110 in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) performed by the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. A probability setting value indicated by the command is set in the setting value memory 223d.

Specifically, if the set value command received by the audio ramp control device 113 during execution of the start-up process indicates a probability set value of "1", the value of the set value memory 223d is set to "1". , indicating a probability setting value of "2", the value in the setting value memory 223d is set to "2", indicating a probability setting value of "3", , the value of the setting value memory 223d is set to "3" and indicates the probability setting value of "4", the value of the setting value memory 223d is set to "4" and the probability setting value is "5". , the value of the set value memory 223d is set to "5", and when the probability set value is "6", the value of the set value memory 223d is set to "6 ”.

In the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 provides the main control device to the player based on the value of the set value memory 223d, the value of the pullback counter 223h (to be described later), and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i. The contents of the performance suggesting the probability set value set in 110 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "setting suggesting performance") are determined, and the determined "setting suggesting performance" can be executed during the jackpot game. It is

Here, the "setting suggestion effect" will be described. The “setting suggesting effect” is a effect suggesting to the player information about the set value of the probability set value set in the main controller 110 . In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "setting suggesting effect" execution lottery is won, the content of the "setting suggesting effect" is determined, and is determined by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute a "setting suggestion effect".

In the first embodiment, as the "setting suggestion effect", an "even-odd suggestion" effect that can suggest to the player whether the probability setting value is an even number or an odd number, and the setting value "1", which is the minimum setting of the probability setting value. ``1 negative suggestion'' effect that can suggest to the player that the set value (that is, the set value "2 to 6") is different from A "456 suggestion" effect that can suggest to the player that either of It is configured to be able to execute four types of effects including the "suggestion" effect.

In the “even-odd suggestion” production, for example, if the probability setting value is an odd number (that is, the setting value “1, 3, 5”), a production that can associate the word “odd” (for example, the character pattern is “fact is stranger than a novel,” and launching a surprise attack). In addition, when the probability setting value is an even number (that is, the setting value "2, 4, 6"), an effect that is associated with the word "even" (for example, the appearance of a clay figure character pattern, or the character patterns Effect of meeting by chance, etc.) is executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

In the "1 negative suggestion" effect, for example, a character pattern (for example, a character pattern imitating a unicorn) that can be associated with the number (word) "1" is exterminated (erased) by another character pattern. It is executed in the pattern display device 81 .

In the "456 suggestion" effect, for example, character patterns that can associate the numbers (words) of "4", "5" and "6" (for example, a signboard pattern of Route 456, a clock pattern pointing to 4:56) etc.) is executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

In the "immediate value suggestion" effect, the third pattern display device 81 executes the effect of displaying a character pattern directly associated with the set value itself of the probability set value. Specifically, for example, when the set probability value is "3", a character pattern (for example, a character pattern imitating a triangle) that is associated with the number (word) "3" is displayed, and the probability When the set value is the set value "4", a character design (for example, a character design imitating a rectangle) that can be associated with the number (word) "4" appears, and the probability set value is the set value "5". In the case of , a character pattern that can be associated with the number (word) "5" (for example, a character pattern imitating a pentagonal star) appears, and if the probability setting value is "6", "6 (for example, a character pattern imitating a honeycomb made up of aggregates of hexagons) is made to appear.

In the first embodiment, in the "immediate price suggestion" effect, when the probability setting value is set to a low value (that is, the set value "1" or "2"), the "immediate price suggestion" effect is not executed. It is configured. This is because, when the probability setting value is set to a low value, when the player uniquely recognizes the setting value, the game value obtained by the pachinko machine 10 is low. There is a possibility that the desire to continue playing the game will fade and the game will be interrupted. Therefore, when the probability set value is set to a low value, the "immediate price suggestion" effect is not executed, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play.

In this way, each of the above-described "setting suggesting effects" is executed to suggest the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to the player, creating a game property that makes the player guess which probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is. By doing so, we are trying to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by executing a "setting suggestion performance" that suggests that the probability setting value is high, the player is made to recognize that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting that easily gives a game value. , the willingness to continue the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

The sub-limit counter 223e, like the limit counter 203h of the main controller 110, is a counter for storing (counting) the number of special symbol jackpots on the sound lamp controller 113 side as well.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the limit counter 203h stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of special symbol jackpots based on the command (limit number command or limit clear command) related to the number of jackpots transmitted from the main controller 110, and the sub limit counter 223e , the number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 is managed.

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a jackpot of any special symbol, and the value of the limit counter 203h in the main control device 110 is incremented by 1 (updated). is received, the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is incremented by 1 (see S1213 in FIG. 35), and the value of the limit counter 203h is cleared (initialized) to "0" in the main controller 110. When the limit clear command is received, the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is cleared to "0" (see S1215 in FIG. 35).

In the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 controls the value of the sub-limit counter 223e, the value of the pull-back counter 223h, which will be described later, the setting value of the disadvantage winning flag 223g, which will also be described later, and the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f, which will also be described later. Based on the value of , a lottery is made for the player as to whether or not to execute the "setting suggestion effect" during the jackpot game. The details of the lottery regarding the "setting suggestion effect" will be described later.

The setting-suggestion lottery counter 223f is a counter used to draw lots to determine whether or not to execute the "setting-suggestion effect".

The value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. For example, 1 is added in sequence within "0 to 99"), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), it returns to "0". It's becoming The value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is updated once (eg, incremented by 1) each time the main process loops.

As described above, when a jackpot occurs (that is, when an opening command indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is received from the main controller 110), the sound ramp control device 113 has a pull-back counter 223h, which will be described later, and a disadvantageous hit flag, which will also be described later. 223g, the sub-limit counter 223e and the values of the setting value memory 223d, the current number of big wins, the pullback situation, etc. are grasped, and based on the situation, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the setting suggestion lottery table 222e "setting suggestion effect" (see S1241 in FIG. 37).

The disadvantageous hit flag 223g indicates that the winning jackpot is less advantageous for the player than the "probability variable A" which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player (that is, the jackpot type "latent probability variable A", "time reduction A"). Or "passing through A."Since game value can be given in these jackpots, it is not necessarily disadvantageous to the player, but for convenience of explanation, "low advantage for the player" is called "disadvantageous". It is a flag for determining whether or not.

This disadvantageous hit flag 223g is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and at the start of the jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot type ``variable latent probability A'', ``time saving A'' or ``pierce A'' has been won. is set to ON (see S1224 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type “variable probability A” or “variable probability B” is won at the start of the jackpot, the setting is turned off (see S1225 in FIG. 36).

In the first embodiment, since the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is turned on, the jackpot types that are more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot types "variable probability A" or "variable probability B" (that is, the jackpot types "latent probability variable A", " It is configured to facilitate the derivation of a lottery result advantageous to the player in the execution lottery of the above-mentioned 'setting suggesting effect' by judging that the jackpot of 'time saving A' or 'rushing A') has been won. . Specifically, when the unfavorable win flag 223g is set to OFF in the execution lottery of the "setting suggesting effect", it is difficult to derive the lottery result in which the "setting suggesting effect" is executed, while the disadvantageous win flag 223g is set to ON, the lottery result in which the "setting suggestion effect" is executed is easily derived. The details of the lottery regarding the "setting suggestion effect" will be described later.

The pullback counter 223h is set during the "time reduction state" (hereinafter referred to as "pullback period") based on the jackpot when the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (6 times in the first embodiment) (that is, when the limit is reached). It is a counter for counting the number of times that a so-called pullback that wins a big win again occurs.

The withdrawal counter 223h is configured to be updatable within the range of "0 to 2", is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then the number of jackpot hits reaches the limit, and , every time a jackpot occurs during the "time reduction state", it is incremented by one. Then, when the value of the pullback counter 223h reaches the maximum value (ie, "2"), the maximum value (ie, "2") is maintained without being updated to any more value. On the other hand, the value of the pullback counter 223h is cleared to "0" when the so-called pullback period ends, that is, when the "time reduction state" ends (see S1209 in FIG. 35).

That is, while the pachinko machine 10 reaches the limit number of special symbol jackpots from the initial state (that is, the jackpot count is 6 times; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the game state after the jackpot is the "time reduction state". (Hereinafter, the period when the limit number of times is reached and the gaming state after the jackpot is the "time reduction state" may be referred to as "during the pullback period"), if any jackpot is won ( Substantially, since it is a right-handed game, if you win the jackpot type "probable variation A" or "short time A" in the second special pattern.The same applies hereinafter.), it is judged to be the first pullback during the pullback period, and this The value of the withdrawal counter 223h is incremented by 1 (that is, set to "1"). After that, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" continues without ending and the number of jackpots is repeated, the limit number of special symbol jackpots is reached again, and the game state after the jackpot is " If any one of the jackpots is won while in the "time reduction state", it is determined to be the second pullback during the second pullback period, and the value of the pullback counter 223h is incremented by 1 (that is, set to "2". )do. After that, even if an additional pullback occurs during the second pullback period, the value of the pullback counter 223h will not change unless the "time reduction state" ends and the "normal game state" is entered. It is kept at "2".

As described above, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives an opening command indicating the occurrence of a big win from the main control device 110, the value of the pullback counter 223h, the above-described disadvantageous win flag 223g, the sub-limit counter 223e and Based on the values in the setting value memory 223d, the current number of big wins, the pullback situation, etc. are grasped, and based on the situation, whether or not to perform the "setting suggestion effect" by the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the setting suggestion lottery table 222e. is drawn (see S1241 in FIG. 37).

In addition, when winning the execution lottery for the above-mentioned "set suggestion effect", the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the pull-back situation and probability set value based on the values of the pull-back counter 223h and the set value memory 223d, and Based on the content, the contents of the "setting suggestion effect" to be executed are selected by a suggestion content lottery counter 223i and a suggestion content lottery table 222f, which will be described later (see S1243 in FIG. 37).

The suggestion content lottery counter 223i is a counter used for determining the content of the "setting suggestion effect" when it is determined that the "setting suggestion effect" is to be executed. If the contents of the "setting suggestion effect" are few (only one), or if the execution timing is fixed (for example, only during the ending effect), the effect will be lacking in sharpness and lack of interest. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by providing variations in the content of the "setting suggesting effect" and enriching the execution timing of the "setting suggesting effect".

The value of the suggested content lottery counter 223i is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. For example, 1 is added in order within "0 to 9"), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "9" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9"), it returns to "0". It's becoming The value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i is updated once (eg, incremented by 1) each time the main process loops.

As described above, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives an opening command indicating the occurrence of a big win from the main control device 110, the sub-limit counter 223e, the disadvantageous win flag 223g, the pullback counter 223h, the setting suggesting lottery counter 223f and the A setting suggestion lottery table 222e is referenced based on the values in the set value memory 223d to determine whether or not to execute the "setting suggestion effect". Then, when execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is determined as a result of the lottery, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the number of pullbacks and the probability set value based on the value of the pullback counter 223h and the value of the set value memory 223d. , and based on the contents thereof, the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and the suggestion content lottery table 222f determine whether or not to execute any of the "setting suggestion effects" and the notification (execution) timing (see S1243 in FIG. 37). ). The details of the lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" will be described later.

The setting suggestion content memory 223j is a memory for storing the content of the "setting suggestion effect" determined by the suggestion content lottery counter 223i or the like and the notification (execution) timing thereof. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the "setting suggestion effect" based on the data stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j.

This setting suggestion content memory 223j is initialized (for example, Null data is written) when power is turned on, and when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines the content of the "setting suggestion effect" and its notification timing, Data corresponding to the determined content is stored (see S1244 in FIG. 37). Then, at the timing when the performance of the big win ends, the setting suggestion content memory 223j is initialized again.

As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the "setting suggestion effect" based on the data stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j. Specifically, the setting suggestion content memory 223j stores any of the "even and odd suggestion" presentation, the "1 negative suggestion" presentation, the "456 suggestion" presentation, or the "immediate price suggestion" presentation. Information indicating whether (setting suggestion type information) is stored, and "round match" is executed at the timing when the probability setting value and the number of rounds for the jackpot match, and executed at the timing when the probability setting value and the number of rounds for the jackpot are different. Information (timing information) indicating at which notification (execution) timing of ``another round'' to be played or ``ending'' to be executed at the timing of a jackpot ending is to be executed. If the data stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is the initial value (for example, Null data), it indicates that the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed. In addition, the selection method of "other rounds" grasps the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot, selects one of the rounds by lottery from among the rounds other than the number of the probability setting value, and selects the round information is set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j.

Here, the setting suggestion lottery table 222e and the suggestion content lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the setting suggestion lottery table 222e, and FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the suggestion content lottery table 222f.

As described above, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives an opening command indicating the occurrence of a big win from the main control device 110, the values of the sub-limit counter 223e, the disadvantageous win flag 223g, the pullback counter 223h and the set value memory 223d Based on this, the current number of big hits, the pullback situation, etc. are grasped, and based on the situation, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the setting suggestion lottery table 222e determine whether or not to perform the "setting suggestion effect" (Fig. 37). S1241 reference). As a result of the lottery, when execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is determined, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the number of pullbacks and the probability based on the value of the pullback counter 223h and the value of the set value memory 223d. The set value is grasped, and based on the content, which "setting suggesting effect" is to be executed and the notification (execution) timing thereof are determined by the suggesting content lottery counter 223i and the suggesting content lottery table 222f (FIG. 37). (see S1243 of ).

First, as shown in FIG. 17, the setting suggestion lottery table 222e is grouped based on the value of the withdrawal counter 223h, the set value of the disadvantageous hit flag 223g, and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e. , the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f for winning the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect".

Specifically, first, the value of the pullback counter 223h is classified into "0" to "2", and among them, whether the setting value of the disadvantage hit flag 223g is "on" or "off" Further, the values of the sub-limit counter 223e are classified into "1" to "6". Then, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is "off", the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "1" to "5". Only when the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "performance" is not assigned and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "6", the setting suggestion lottery counter that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion performance". 223f values are "0 to 4".

That is, in a situation where the pull-back jackpot has not been made even once during the pull-back period, and when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is "probable variable A" or "probable variable B", the number of jackpots is from 1 Up to 5 times, the execution lottery of "setting suggestion effect" will not be won (that is, the probability of winning is 0%), and only in the situation where the number of jackpots is 6 times (that is, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit), 5% It is configured to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" with probability.

On the other hand, even if the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0", if the disadvantageous winning flag 223g is "on", the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" for each value of the sub-limit counter 223e value is assigned. Specifically, when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "1", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 4", and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is In the case of "2", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 9", and when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "3", the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is "0 to 14" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "4", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 19" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0-24" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "0 to 24". When the value is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 29".

That is, in a situation where the pull-back jackpot has not been done once during the pull-back period, and the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is "latency probability change A", "time reduction A" or "rush A", If the number of jackpots is 1 (i.e., the situation in which the limit number of times is reached when there are 5 more jackpots. Hereinafter, reaching the limit number of times with n more jackpots (n is a natural number) is referred to as "remaining limit number n times") is 5% probability, if the number of jackpots is 2 times (that is, the remaining limit number of times is 4), the probability is 10%, if the number of jackpots is 3 times (that is, the remaining limit number of times 3 times) is 15% probability, if the number of jackpots is 4 times (that is, the remaining limit number of times is 2), the probability is 20%, if the number of jackpots is 5 times (that is, the remaining limit number is 1 time), the probability is 25%. When the number of jackpot wins is 6 times (that is, when the limit is reached), there is a 30% probability of winning the execution lottery of the "setting suggestive effect".

Therefore, in a situation where no big win is made during the pullback period, the jackpot type that is won is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (that is, the jackpot type "variable probability A" or "variable probability B"). The jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type “latency probability variable A”, “time saving A” or “rushing A”) is configured to be more likely to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion performance”. In addition, in a situation in which the jackpot of the pullback has not been made even once during the pullback period, the closer to the limit number of times of the jackpot (that is, the sub-limit counter 223e is "6"), the more the "setting suggestion performance" execution lottery is won. configured to be easy. In particular, when the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is "on" (that is, when the winning jackpot type is "latent probability variable A", "time reduction A" or "rush A"), the value of the sub-limit counter 223e increases. The winning probability is increased by 5% each time the game is played.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot type "variable latent probability A" is successively won, the closer the consecutive number of times is to the limit number of times, the more likely it is to win the "setting suggestion effect". In other words, even if a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the possibility of grasping the set contents of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is increased from when the advantageous jackpot type is won. It is possible to make it easy to recognize the determination element of whether or not to continue the game on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, even when a disadvantageous jackpot type is won, as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number of times, it is made easier for the player to suggest the setting contents of the probability setting value, and the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily known. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by successive winnings of the disadvantageous jackpot types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 17, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1" and the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is "off", the value of the sub-limit counter 223e from "1" to "4" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f for winning the execution of the setting suggestion performance is not assigned, while the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is ``5'', the setting suggestion lottery for winning the execution of the ``setting suggestion performance''. When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 4" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 9". It's becoming

That is, in a situation where the pull-back jackpot is won once during the pull-back period, and when the jackpot type of the jackpot that is won is "probable variable A" or "probable variable B", the number of jackpots is from 1 Up to 4 times, there is no winning in the execution lottery of "setting suggestion performance" (that is, the probability of winning is 0%). It is configured to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestive effect" with a probability of 10% in each situation (that is, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit).

On the other hand, even if the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1", if the disadvantageous winning flag 223g is "on", the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" for each value of the sub-limit counter 223e value is assigned. Specifically, when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "1", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 34", and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is In the case of "2", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 39", and when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "3", the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is "0 to 44" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "4", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 49" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 54" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "0 to 54". When the value is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 59".

That is, in a situation where the pull-back jackpot has been won once during the pull-back period, and the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won is "latency probability change A", "time reduction A" or "rush A", If the number of jackpots is 1 (that is, the remaining limit number of times is 5), the probability is 35%. If the number of hits is 4 (that is, the remaining limit number of times is 3), the probability is 45%. If the number of times is 1), the probability is 55%, and if the number of big wins is 6 times (that is, when the limit is reached), the probability is 60%.

Therefore, in a situation where one pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, it is easier to win the execution lottery for the ``setting suggestion performance'' than in a situation where the pull-back jackpot is not won even once during the pull-back period. is configured as In particular, if the winning jackpot type is "latency probability change A", "time saving A" or "rushing A", the winning probability of "setting suggestion effect" will be pulled back once during the pullback period. It is configured so as to dramatically increase (for example, 5% to 35% when the sub-limit counter 223e is "1") from a state in which it has not been reached. In addition, in a situation where one pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, the closer to the jackpot limit number of times, the more likely it is to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect", and the winning jackpot type is the player. The configuration in which the disadvantageous jackpot type is more likely to win the execution lottery of the ``setting suggestion performance'' than the advantageous jackpot type is the same as the configuration of the situation in which no pullback jackpot is made during the pullback period. .

Therefore, for example, in a situation where one pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, the closer the consecutive number of times is to the limit number of times, the more likely it is to win the "setting suggestion effect." In other words, when a jackpot is won during the pullback period and a series of jackpot wins occur, the set contents of the probability setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are based on a situation in which the jackpot has not been pulled back even once during the pullback period. By increasing the possibility of grasping, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know the factors for judging whether or not to continue the game on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加For this reason, even when a disadvantageous jackpot type is won, as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number of times, it is made easier for the player to suggest the setting contents of the probability setting value, and the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily known. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by successive winnings of the disadvantageous jackpot types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 17, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" and the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is "off", the value of the sub-limit counter 223e from "1" to "3" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f for winning the execution of the setting suggestion performance is not assigned, while the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is ``4'', the setting suggestion lottery for winning the execution of the ``setting suggestion performance''. When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 4" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is "0 to 9" and the sub When the value of the limit counter 223e is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 14".

That is, the situation is such that the jackpot of the pullback is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the pullback period again based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the jackpot is won. If the jackpot type is “variable probability A” or “variable probability B”, the number of times of jackpot is from 1 to 3 times, without winning the execution lottery of “setting suggestion effect” (that is, winning probability 0%) , 5% probability when the number of jackpots is 4 (that is, 2 remaining limit times), 10% probability when the number of jackpots is 5 times (that is, 1 remaining limit number), 6 times ( That is, when the number of jackpot hits reaches the limit, there is a 15% probability of winning the execution lottery of the "setting suggesting effect".

On the other hand, even if the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2", if the disadvantageous winning flag 223g is "on", the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" for each value of the sub-limit counter 223e value is assigned. Specifically, when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "1", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 64", and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is In the case of "2", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 69", and when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "3", the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is "0 to 74" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "4", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 79" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 89" and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "0 to 89". When the value is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 99".

That is, the situation is such that the jackpot of the pullback is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the pullback period again based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the jackpot is won. If the jackpot type is “latency probability change A”, “time saving A” or “pierce A”, if the number of jackpots is 1 (that is, the remaining limit number of times is 5), the probability is 65%, and the number of jackpots is 2 times (i.e., the remaining limit number of times is 4), the probability is 70%. 80% probability for 2 remaining limit times), 90% probability for 5 jackpots (i.e. 1 remaining limit count), 100% for 6 jackpots (i.e. reaching the limit). % probability, it is configured to win the execution lottery of "setting suggestion effect".

Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, even once during the pullback period. It is constructed so as to make it easier to win the execution lottery of the ``setting suggesting presentation'' than in a situation where the big win for pullback is not made or a big win for pullback is won once during the pullback period. In particular, when the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is "on", that is, when the winning jackpot type is "latency probability change A", "time saving A" or "rush A", the winning probability of "setting suggestion effect" , a dramatic increase from a situation in which the pull-back jackpot has not been won once during the pull-back period, or a situation in which the pull-back jackpot has been won once during the pull-back period (for example, the sub-limit counter 223e is set to "1"). 5% or 35%→65%). Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2", the unfavorable win flag 223g is "on", and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "6", the "setting suggestion effect" is executed with a probability of 100%. is configured to determine

In addition, during the pullback period, the pullback jackpot is won, and after that, the jackpot is won again during the pullback period based on reaching the jackpot frequency limit. , a structure in which it is easy to win the execution lottery of the ``set suggestion performance'', and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is more likely to win the execution lottery of the ``set suggestion performance'' than the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is the same as the situation in which the pull-back jackpot has not been won even once during the pull-back period, or the pull-back jackpot has been won once during the pull-back period.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the player wins a pull-back jackpot during the pull-back period and then wins another jackpot during the pull-back period again based on reaching the limit number of times of jackpots, it is disadvantageous for the player. As the number of winning times of the jackpot type approaches the limit number of times, it becomes easier to win the "setting suggestion effect". In other words, if you win a jackpot during the pullback period, and a series of big wins occur, and then you win the jackpot again during the pullback period, the jackpot will be pulled back once during the pullback period. or a situation in which the jackpot of the pullback is won once during the pullback period, the possibility of grasping the setting contents of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is increased so that the player can grasp the pachinko machine. It is possible to make it easier to notify the determination element of whether or not to continue the game in 10. Therefore, even if a disadvantageous jackpot type is won and the remaining jackpot count is reduced, the closer the jackpot count is to the limit, the easier it is to suggest the set contents of the probability set value to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the advantage that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily known, and to alleviate the disappointment caused by the continuous winning of the disadvantageous jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the situation where the pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, and then the jackpot is won again during the second pull-back period based on reaching the limit number of times of the jackpot, By allowing the player to win a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the content of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily suggested more concretely. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot is won multiple times, for example, instead of the right-handed game for winning the second start port 64b that is likely to win the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, the player A left-handed game is performed in order to win the first start port 64a that is likely to win the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and a lottery game with the first special pattern that is likely to win the jackpot type that is disadvantageous is executed. ” can be created. As a result, if the player predicts that the number of jackpots will be different from the limit number of times in a situation where the "setting suggestion effect" has not yet been executed after winning several pullback jackpots (for example, The remaining limit number of times 5 to 3) is a direct game value by performing a right-handed game and performing a lottery game with a second special symbol to win a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player. It becomes possible to aim at acquisition of a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, when the player predicts that the number of times is close to the limit, the player performs a left-handed game and performs a lottery game with the first special symbol, daringly wins a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and plays an indirect game. It becomes possible to aim at the execution of the "setting suggestion production" which is the value. By constructing in this way, it is possible to create a variety of games by combining the number of hits with the limit number of hits and the execution of the "setting suggestion effect". The playability can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the closer to the limit number of times, the more likely it is that the "setting suggesting effect" will be executed. In other words, when the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, there is a high possibility that there is little or no difference between the number of big wins and the limit number of times. Therefore, by changing the execution probability of the "setting suggestion effect" according to the limit number of times, when the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, the player can guess the limit number of times and whether the limit has been reached. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the suggestion lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the suggestion content lottery table 222f is grouped based on the value of the pullback counter 223h and the value (set value) of the set value memory 223d, and each group has a "set suggestion effect". A plurality of notification (execution) timings are divided. Then, for each of the divided notification timings, the content of the "setting suggestion effect" (that is, any of the "even and odd suggestion" effect, the "1 negative suggestion" effect, the "456 suggestion" effect, or the "immediate price suggestion" effect) ) are associated with possible values of the suggestion lottery counter 223i. That is, when execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is determined, the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is determined based on the value of the withdrawal counter 223h, the value of the set value memory 223d, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i. and its contents are collectively determined.

Specifically, first, the value of the pullback counter 223h is classified into any one of "0" to "2", and among them, each value (set value) of the set value memory 223d is divided. , it is classified for each notification timing of "setting suggestion effect". Then, the type of "setting suggestion effect" and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i are associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "0" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "1", the setting value of the setting value memory 223d and the "setting suggestion effect" , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0", It has become. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "1", the setting value of the setting value memory 223d and the "setting suggesting effect" are executed. In the "other rounds" (namely, 2nd to 16th rounds of the jackpot), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even and odd suggestion" effect is "1 to 4". . That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", the "ending" indicating that the ending effect at the end of the jackpot is in progress. "The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the effect is "5 to 9". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd indication" effect can be selected at the timing of the "ending". , and other "setting suggestion effects" cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with them.

In other words, if the pullback jackpot has not been hit even once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0") and the set probability value is "1", Only the 'odd and odd suggestion' effect can be selected, and the 'round match' timing is selected at a rate of 10%, the 'other round' timing at 40%, and the 'ending' timing at a rate of 50%.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the probability setting value is the set value "1", the "1 negative suggestion" effect, the "456 suggestion" effect, and the "direct price suggestion" effect are not selected. ing.

First, since the “1 negative suggestion” effect is a suggestion effect that denies that the probability setting value is the setting value “1”, when the probability setting value is the setting value “1”, the “1 negative If the "suggestion" is executed, the content of the presentation will be inconsistent, which may confuse the player. Therefore, when the probability set value is the set value ``1'', the ``1 negative suggestion'' performance is configured not to be selected as the ``set suggestion performance'', and an appropriate performance is executed to cause unnecessary confusion for the player. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, since the "456 suggestion" production is a production that suggests that the probability setting value is one of "4 to 6", the probability setting value is a setting value that is not "4 to 6" (for example, If the "456 suggestion" effect is executed when the set value is "1"), the content of the effect will be inconsistent, which may confuse the player. Therefore, when the probability setting value is the set value "1", the "456 suggestion" effect is not selected as the "setting suggestion effect", and an appropriate effect is executed to cause unnecessary confusion for the player. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, since the "immediate value suggestion" effect is an effect that directly suggests the set value of the probability set value to the player, the game value obtained is low (that is, the set value "1" or "2" ), the player understands that the game value obtained by the pachinko machine 10 is low and loses the desire to continue the game, and stops (suspends) the game. There is a risk of doing so. Therefore, when the probability set value is set to be low, it is configured not to execute the "immediate price suggestion" effect, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play.

Also, the "immediate price suggestion" effect can be selected only when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2", and is configured not to be selected when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" or "1". ing. By configuring in this way, the more the pull-back jackpot is piled up during the pull-back period, the more the direct suggestion content can be executed in the "setting suggestion effect", and the game value other than the game value by winning the pull-back jackpot becomes possible. Benefits can be given to players.

In the first embodiment, when the notification timing of "another round" is selected as the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect", the "setting suggestion effect" is executed in a number of rounds different from the set probability value. . The determination of this "number of rounds different from the probability setting value" may be performed in a fixed round (for example, the final round in a jackpot), or a round performed by another counter or the like is randomly selected. It may be configured as

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", "round match" (that is, two rounds of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0, 1". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", in "other rounds" (that is, the 1st, 3rd to 16th rounds of the jackpot), The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "2 to 4". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", in the "ending", a suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 8", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because they are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i.

In other words, if the pullback jackpot has not been hit even once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0") and the set probability value is "2", "Even and odd suggestion" production or "1 negative suggestion" production can be selected, "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 20%, and "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "other round" is 30 %, 40% for the "even and odd suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing, and 10% for the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the set probability value is "2", the "456 suggestion" effect and the "direct price suggestion" effect are not selected. is the same as when the probability setting value is the setting value "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", "round match" (that is, 3 rounds of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0 to 2". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", only the "even and odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", "other rounds" (that is, the 1st, 2nd, 4th to 16th rounds of the jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "3, 4". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot has not been hit even once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0") and the set probability value is "3", "Even and odd suggestion" production or "1 negative suggestion" production can be selected, "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 30%, and "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "other round" is 20 %, 40% for the "even and odd suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing, and 10% for the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the probability setting value is the setting value "3", the "456 suggestion" effect is not selected. It is the same as the value "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "4", "round match" (that is, 4 rounds of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0 to 3". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", "other rounds" (that is, the 1st to 3rd and 5th to 16th rounds of the jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "4, 5". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "6, 7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect The value is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are produced. The effect or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, if the pullback jackpot has not been hit even once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0") and the set probability value is "4", "Even and odd suggestion" production, "1 negative suggestion" production or "456 suggestion" production can be selected, "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 40%, "other round" timing " Even-odd suggestion" production is 20%. The “456 suggestion” effect is selected at a rate of 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", "round match" (that is, 5 rounds of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0 to 4". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", "other rounds" (that is, the 1st to 4th and 6th to 16th rounds of the jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "5, 6". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", in the "ending", a suggestion content lottery that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", at the timing of "ending", "even-odd suggestion" effect and "1 negative suggestion" are produced. The effect or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, if the pullback jackpot has not been hit even once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0") and the probability setting value is "5", "Even odd suggestion" production, "1 negative suggestion" production or "456 suggestion" production can be selected, "Even odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 50%, "Other round" timing " Even-odd suggestion" production is 20%. The “456 suggestion” effect is selected at a rate of 10%.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the number of rounds to be executed at the time of the jackpot, the jackpot type "variable probability A" in which 16 round games are executed (hereinafter, the jackpot type "variable probability A" is referred to as "16R Jackpot”), and a jackpot type “probability change B”, “latency probability change A”, “time reduction A” or “rush A” in which four round games are executed (hereinafter, jackpot type “probability change B ”, “Latency Probability A”, “Time Saving A” or “Push A” may be collectively referred to as “4R jackpot”.) is provided. Therefore, when the 16R jackpot is won, the "setting suggestion effect" can be executed at any timing of "round match" or "other round", while when the 4R jackpot is won, the "setting suggestion When the 5th round or later is selected as the notification timing of "effect", the "setting suggestion effect" cannot be executed at the determined notification timing for the big win.

In the development process of the pachinko machine 10, the game specifications related to the number of rounds and the like in the jackpot game are likely to be developed later than the image development and software control development. may be changed relatively late in the process of Therefore, if the number of rounds for the jackpot, which was assumed at the beginning of development, is reduced relatively late in the process of developing the model, the rounds that were possible with the game specifications assumed at the beginning of model development will be executed. sometimes it becomes impossible. As a result, as in the present embodiment, when the game feature of "executing the ``setting suggestion effect'' in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability set value" is installed, the number of rounds less than the settable range of the probability set value When there are a number of jackpot types, assuming that you have won the lottery for executing the "set suggestion effect", you will not be able to execute the "set suggestion effect" in the round corresponding to the probability setting value exceeding the number of rounds of the winning jackpot. put away.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the round selected as the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the notification timing is changed to the notification timing during the ending effect that is executed for any jackpot. It is configured to execute a "setting suggestion effect". In this way, by executing the change processing of the notification timing, when winning the execution lottery of "setting suggestion effect", even if there is no round corresponding to the notification timing initially won, all jackpot types It is possible to reliably execute the "setting suggestion effect" in the ending effect that can be executed in. Therefore, even if the game specifications are changed, without changing the video development or software development at the time of model development, it is possible to "execute the `` setting suggestion effect '' in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability setting value. Even if there is no corresponding round, by executing the "setting suggestion effect" in the ending effect, the winning "setting suggestion effect" is surely executed, It is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that in both the case of "matching rounds" and the case of "other rounds", when there is no round selected as the notification timing, the above change processing is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "0" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "6", "round match" (that is, 6 rounds of jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0 to 5". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", only the "even and odd indication" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", "other rounds" (that is, 1st to 5th and 7th to 16th rounds of jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "6". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", only the "even and odd indication" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "0" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are produced. The effect or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, if the pullback jackpot has not been hit even once during the pullback period (i.e., the value of the pullback counter 223h is "0") and the set probability value is "6", "Even and odd suggestion" production, "1 negative suggestion" production or "456 suggestion" production can be selected, "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 60%, "other round" timing " Even-odd suggestion" production is 10%. The “456 suggestion” effect is selected at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in a situation where no single pull-back jackpot has been made during the pull-back period, the higher the probability setting value is, the more likely it is that "round match" will be selected as the notification timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect", and the probability setting. The lower the value, the easier it is for the "ending" to be selected as the notification timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect". By varying the timing at which the set value can be notified according to the set probability value in this manner, a game element is created in which the player guesses the set probability value according to the execution timing of the "setting suggesting effect", and the interest in the game is created. can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "1", "round match" (that is, one round of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0, 1". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", in the "other rounds" (that is, the 2nd to 16th rounds of the jackpot), The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the suggestion effect is "2 to 7". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "other round". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "8, 9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd indication" effect can be selected at the timing of the "ending". , and other "setting suggestion effects" cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with them.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1") and the set probability value is "1", Only the 'odd and odd suggestion' effect can be selected, and the 'matching round' timing is 20%, the 'other round' timing is 60%, and the 'ending' timing is 20%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "2", "round match" (that is, two rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 2”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 3”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", at the timing of the "round match", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is displayed. " effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because they are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", in "other rounds" (that is, the 1st, 3rd to 16th rounds of the jackpot), The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “4 to 6”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “7”. there is That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", at the timing of the "other round", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is displayed. " effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because they are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i.

Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "8", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1") and the set probability value is "2", "Even odd suggestion" production or "1 negative suggestion" production can be selected, "even odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 30%, and "1 negative suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" 10%, 30% for "even-odd suggestion" at the timing of "other round", 10% for "1 negative suggestion" at the timing of "other round", and 10% for "even-odd suggestion" at the timing of "ending" ' effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and '1 negative suggestion' effect at the same timing of 'ending' is selected at a rate of 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "3", "round match" (that is, 3 rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 3”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 4”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", at the timing of the "round match", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is displayed. " effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because they are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i.

Also, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", "other rounds" (that is, the 1st, 2nd, 4th to 16th rounds of the jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “5, 6”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “7”. It's becoming That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", at the timing of "another round", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is displayed. " effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because they are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", in the "ending", a suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "8", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect and the "immediate price suggestion" effect are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1") and the probability setting value is "3", "Even odd suggestion" production or "1 negative suggestion" production can be selected, "even odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 40%, and "1 negative suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" 10%, 20% for "even-odd suggestion" at the timing of "other round", 10% for "1 negative suggestion" at the timing of "other round", and 10% for "even-odd suggestion" at the timing of "ending" ' effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and '1 negative suggestion' effect at the same timing of 'ending' is selected at a rate of 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", "round match" (that is, 4 rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “0, 1”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 2”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is “3”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", at the timing of "round match", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are displayed. ' effect or '456 suggestion' effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the 'immediate price suggestion' effect and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", "other rounds" (that is, the 1st to 3rd and 5th to 16th rounds of the jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “4”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “5”, and “456 suggestions "The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the effect is "6". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", at the timing of "another round", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are displayed. ' effect or '456 suggestion' effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the 'immediate price suggestion' effect and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are produced. The effect or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1") and the probability setting value is "4", "Even and odd suggestion" production, "1 negative suggestion" production or "456 suggestion" production can be selected, and the "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 20%, and the same at the timing of "round match" "1 negative suggestion" production is 10%, "456 suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 10%, "odd odd suggestion" production at the timing of "other round" is 10%, also "other round" 10% of the ``1 negative suggestion'' production at the timing of , 10% of the ``456 suggestion'' production at the timing of ``other round'', 10% of the ``odd odd suggestion'' production at the timing of ``ending'', and `` 10% of the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing and 10% of the "456 suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing are selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", "round match" (that is, 5 rounds of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “0”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “1,” 2”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is “3”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", at the timing of the "round match", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are displayed. ' effect or '456 suggestion' effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the 'immediate price suggestion' effect and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", "other rounds" (that is, 1 to 4, 6 to 16 rounds of jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “4”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “5”, and “456 suggestions "The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the effect is "6". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are produced at the timing of the "other round". ' effect or '456 suggestion' effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the 'immediate price suggestion' effect and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", in the "ending", a suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", at the timing of "ending", "even-odd suggestion" effect and "1 negative suggestion" are produced. The effect or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1") and the set probability value is "5", "Even and odd suggestion" production, "1 negative suggestion" production or "456 suggestion" production can be selected, and "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 10%, also at the timing of "round match" "1 negative suggestion" production is 20%, "456 suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 10%, "odd odd suggestion" production at the timing of "other round" is 10%, also "other round" 10% of the ``1 negative suggestion'' production at the timing of , 10% of the ``456 suggestion'' production at the timing of ``other round'', 10% of the ``odd odd suggestion'' production at the timing of ``ending'', and `` 10% of the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing and 10% of the "456 suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing are selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "1" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "6", "round match" (that is, 6 rounds of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "1". , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "2, 3". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", at the timing of "round match", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are displayed. ' effect or '456 suggestion' effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the 'immediate price suggestion' effect and cannot be selected.

Also, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", "other rounds" (that is, the 1st to 5th and 7th to 16th rounds of the jackpot) , the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “4”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “5”, and “456 suggestions "The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the effect is "6". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", at the timing of the "other round", the "even-odd suggestion" effect and the "1 negative suggestion" are displayed. ' effect or '456 suggestion' effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the 'immediate price suggestion' effect and cannot be selected.

Furthermore, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", in the "ending", a suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", at the timing of "ending", "even-odd suggestion" effect and "1 negative suggestion" are produced. The effect or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, when the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "1") and the probability setting value is "6", "Even and odd suggestion" production, "1 negative suggestion" production or "456 suggestion" production can be selected, and "even and odd suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 10%, also at the timing of "round match" "1 negative suggestion" production is 10%, "456 suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 20%, "odd odd suggestion" production at the timing of "other round" is 10%, also "other round" 10% of the ``1 negative suggestion'' production at the timing of , 10% of the ``456 suggestion'' production at the timing of ``other round'', 10% of the ``odd odd suggestion'' production at the timing of ``ending'', and `` 10% of the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing and 10% of the "456 suggestion" effect at the "ending" timing are selected.

In this way, in the situation where the pull-back jackpot is won once during the pull-back period, compared to the situation where the pull-back jackpot is not won even once during the pull-back period, the content of the probability set value is more specific. It is configured so that the "setting suggestion effect" suggested to the player is easily selected. Specifically, in a situation where the pull-back jackpot has been won once during the pull-back period, the content of the probability set value is higher than the situation where the pull-back jackpot has not been won even once during the pull-back period. The "1 negative suggestion" effect and the "456 suggestion" effect, which are easy to guess, are configured to be easily executed. Therefore, if the probability setting value is high, it is suggested that the high setting is achieved by winning the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" in the situation where the pullback jackpot is won once during the pullback period. When the ``setting suggestion performance'' is executed, a direct game value is given by winning the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and an indirect game of suggesting the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is given. It is possible to easily add value and improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "1", "round match" (that is, one round of jackpot) At the second timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect is "0 to 2". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd suggestion" effect can be selected at the timing of the "round match". Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other "setting suggestion effect" and cannot be selected.

In addition, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect. The value of the counter 223i is "3 to 9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "1", only the "even-odd indication" effect can be selected at the timing of the "ending". , and other "setting suggestion effects" cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with them.

In other words, during the pullback period, the pullback jackpot is won, and then the jackpot is won again during the pullback period based on reaching the jackpot frequency limit (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2") and the probability setting value is the set value "1", the "even-odd suggest" effect can be selected, and the "even-odd suggest" effect at the timing of the "round match" is 30. %, and 70% of the "even-odd suggestion" effects at the timing of the "ending" are selected.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2", the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i at the notification timing of "another round" is not assigned. That is, since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed at the notification timing of "another round" in which the contents of the probability setting value and the number of rounds of the notification timing do not match, the probability setting value is set only at the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect". can be made to be guessed by the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily guess the probability set value, and to improve the interest in the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", "round match" (that is, two rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is “0, 1”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 2, 3”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", at the timing of the "round match", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is displayed. ' effect can be selected, and the '456 suggestion' effect or the 'immediate price suggestion' effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "even-odd suggestion" effect. The value of the counter 223i is "4 to 6", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "7 to 9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "2", at the timing of the "ending", the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect or the "immediate price suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, during the pullback period, the pullback jackpot is won, and then the jackpot is won again during the pullback period based on reaching the jackpot frequency limit (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2") and the probability setting value is the set value "2", the "even odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect can be selected, and at the timing of the "round match" ``Even and odd suggestion'' production is 20%, ``1 negative suggestion'' production at the timing of ``round match'' is 20%, ``even and odd suggestion'' production at the timing of ``ending'' is 30%, and the timing of ``ending'' The “1 negative suggestion” effect is selected at a rate of 30%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "3", "round match" (that is, 3 rounds of jackpot) 2 timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "0 to 4", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is "5". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", at the timing of "round match", "1 negative suggestion" effect or "immediate value The "suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "even odd suggestion" effect or the "456 suggestion" effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

In addition, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", in the "ending", the content of the suggestion that the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is won. The value of the lottery counter 223i is "6 to 8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "3", at the timing of the "ending", the "1 negative suggestion" effect or the "immediate value suggestion" is produced. ' effect can be selected, and the 'even odd suggestion' effect or the '456 suggestion' effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

In other words, the situation is such that the jackpot is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value. is the set value “3”, the “1 negative suggestion” effect or the “immediate price suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “1 negative suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 50%, similarly “ 10% of the "direct price suggestion" production at the timing of "round match", 30% of the "1 negative suggestion" production at the "ending" timing, and 10% of the "direct price suggestion" production at the "ending" timing %.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "4", "round match" (that is, 4 rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "0 to 3", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is " 4”. That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "immediate value suggestion" is produced at the timing of the "round match". ' effect can be selected, and the 'even-odd suggestion' effect or the '1 negative suggestion' effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In addition, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 8", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "4", at the timing of the "ending", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "immediate price suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, it is a situation in which a pullback jackpot is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value. is the set value “4”, the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct price suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “456 suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 40%, and the “round match” effect is 40%. 10% of the "immediate price suggestion" production at the timing of ", 40% of the "456 suggestion" production at the "ending" timing, and 10% of the "immediate price suggestion" production at the "ending" timing Selected by

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the setting value memory 223d is "5", "round match" (that is, 5 rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "0 to 2", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is " 3, 4”. That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", at the timing of "round match", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "immediate value suggestion" is displayed. ' effect can be selected, and the 'even-odd suggestion' effect or the '1 negative suggestion' effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In addition, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect. The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 7", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is "8, 9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", at the timing of the "ending", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "immediate value suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, it is a situation in which a pullback jackpot is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value. is the set value “5”, the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct value suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “456 suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 30%, and the “round match” effect is 30%. 20% of the "immediate price suggestion" production at the timing of ", 30% of the "456 suggestion" production at the "ending" timing, and 20% of the "immediate price suggestion" production at the "ending" timing Selected by

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", "round match" (that is, 6 rounds of jackpot) timing), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "0, 1", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is " 2 to 4”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "immediate price suggestion" is produced at the timing of "round match". ' effect can be selected, and the 'even-odd suggestion' effect or the '1 negative suggestion' effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In addition, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", in the "ending", the suggestion content lottery that wins the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect The value of the counter 223i is "5, 6", and the value of the suggestion lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the "immediate price suggestion" effect is "7-9". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", at the timing of "ending", the "456 suggestion" effect or "immediate value suggestion" is produced. An effect can be selected, and the "even-odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with it.

In other words, it is a situation in which a pullback jackpot is won during the pullback period, and then the jackpot is won again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value. is the set value “6”, the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct price suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “456 suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 20%, and the “round match” effect is 20%. 30% of the "immediate price suggestion" production at the timing of ", 20% of the "456 suggestion" production at the "ending" timing, and 30% of the "immediate price suggestion" production at the "ending" timing Selected by

In this way, in the case where the pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, when the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is won, the greater the number of pull-backs, the more specific the suggestion content in the "setting suggestion effect". (directly or easily guessed by the player). Therefore, as the number of pullbacks increases, the player can easily recognize the setting contents of the probability setting value, and the advantage of knowing the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be given. As a result, it is possible to provide a direct game value in the form of a big win during the pullback period and an indirect game value in the form of a suggestion of a set probability value, thereby increasing the interest of the game during the pullback period. can.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to be more likely to be executed at the timing related to the probability setting value itself (that is, the timing of the "round match") according to the number of pullbacks. ing. That is, since it is possible to estimate the probability setting value based on the number of pullbacks (situation) and the execution timing of the "setting suggestive effect", by grasping the number of pullbacks and the execution timing of the "setting suggestive effect", It is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess the probability setting value, and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description is continued. The big win effect flag 223k is a flag indicating that the big win is being executed in the ON state and that the big win effect should be executed in the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

The jackpot effect flag 223k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when an opening command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1222 in FIG. 36). Then, it is turned off at the timing when the jackpot state ends (see S1309 in FIG. 38). The MPU 221 executes the setting process of the big win effect in the big win effect process for executing the effect related to the big win, when the big win effect flag 223k is turned on (see S1302 to S1311 in FIG. 38).

The sub-round counter 223m, like the round counter 203i of the main controller 110, is a counter for counting the number of rounds (the number of openings of the big winning opening 65a) in the big win on the sound lamp control device 113 side as well.

The value of this sub-round counter 223m is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. are added (see S1231 in FIG. 36). That is, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to "1" in the first round of the big win, and the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to "2" in the second round of the big win. In the 16th round of the jackpot, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to "16" (see S1231 in FIG. 36). Then, when an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot state is received from the main controller 110, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is cleared to "0" (see S1234 in FIG. 36).

The sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of rounds in the jackpot by referring to the value of the sub-round counter 223m, and the value of the sub-round counter 223m and the determined notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" match. 38 (S1302: Yes in FIG. 38), the content of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is executed (see S1303 in FIG. 38).

The ending flag 223n is turned on to indicate that it is the ending period in the jackpot state, and the third pattern display device 81 or the like should execute the jackpot ending effects such as "setting suggesting effects" at the timing of "ending". is a flag indicating

This ending flag 223n is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when an ending command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1233 in FIG. 36). Then, it is turned off at the timing of setting the "setting suggestion effect" at the timing of the "ending" (see S1305 in FIG. 38). When the ending flag 223n is turned on, the MPU 221 executes the effect setting during the ending period of the jackpot effect (see S1303, S1305 to S1307 in FIG. 38).

The sound lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the ending flag 223n to grasp the timing of the ending effect in the big win, and the set value of the ending flag 223n and the notification timing of the determined "setting suggestion effect". If they match (see S1302: Yes in FIG. 38), the content of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is executed (see S1303 in FIG. 38).

The first reserved information storage area 223o is information for performing a variable effect of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls command. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by.

Voice lamp control device 113, using the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223o, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, variation of the first special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223p is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls command This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second different symbol transmitted by.

Voice lamp control device 113 uses the value of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223p, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, the variation of the second special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The execution information storage area 223q is the information of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main controller 110 acquires from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning. , is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation production, in order to execute the setting of the variation production of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, etc., the above-described first reservation information storage Information (counters C1 to C3, CS1 etc. ) are shifted to this execution information storage area 223q.

Details of the first pending information storage area 223o, the second pending information storing area 223p, and the execution information storing area 223q will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing configurations of the first pending information storage area 223o, the second pending information storing area 223p, and the execution information storing area 223q.

The first pending information storage area 223o has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223o1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223o2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223o3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223o4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223p has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223o. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223p1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223p2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223p3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223p4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223q, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223q1 storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed, and a jackpot type counter. A jackpot type counter storage area 223q2 where the value of C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223q3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. 223q4 are provided at least.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223q is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed. In addition, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol variation performance in terms of time among the reserved first special symbol variation performances, and is the first suspension. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and the third area that stores the first suspension information. The area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is retained the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performance of the first special symbol that is retained, and the fourth area for storing the first retention information is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol retained fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the first special symbol held. Further, the first area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation performance that is temporally first suspended among the suspended second special symbol variation performances, and is the second suspension. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended, and the third area that stores the second suspension information. The area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained, and the fourth area for storing the second retention information is reserved. It is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol retained fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol held.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the corresponding special symbol is extracted from the pending ball number command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 puts the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the corresponding first hold information storage first to fourth areas or second hold information storage first to fourth areas. Jackpot random number counter storage areas 223o1 and 223p1, jackpot type counter storage areas 223o2 and 223p2, stop pattern selection counter storage areas 223o3 and 223p3, and variation type counter storage area 223o4 in areas corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command. , 223p4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special The number of symbol fluctuation effects is X, and the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are retained at the X-th time of the suspended variable effects of the first special symbol. Since it corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first reservation information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the first reserved 1st area X of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, it is stored in the first suspension information storage area 223o or the second suspension information storage area 223p. The information obtained is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance are stored in the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. to each of the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4. On the other hand, when there is no reserved information about the second special symbol, and only reserved information about the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first storage area 223o1 to 223o4 of the first storage area 1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol reserved for the first time are currently It is moved to each storage area 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the variable effect being executed.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage first area. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage second area, and the second The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the third pending information storage area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage area 223q are moved to the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the third area for storing 1 pending information are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the second area for storing the first pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223q stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 4 area, and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. 223q, the first pending information storage area 223o, and the second pending information storage area 223p.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol and the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of holding balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended among the first to fourth areas storing the first suspension information and the first to fourth areas storing the second suspension information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 provides the first reservation information storage area 223o and the second reservation information storage area 223p, and changes the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223o and the second suspension information storage area 223p , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

In addition, the above-described shift processing in the first reservation information storage area 223o or the second reservation information storage area 223p and the execution information storage area 223q is performed when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received (variation pattern Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c before being updated based on the reception of the command and the stop type command), the first reservation information storage first to fourth areas And the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the pending variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information.

For example, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223o (first reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas) are stored. In this case, the data in the first area storing the first pending information is shifted to the execution information storing area 223q, the data in the second area storing the second pending information is shifted to the first area storing the first pending information, and the first pending information The data in the third storage area is shifted to the second area for storing the first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing the first pending information.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reserved information storage first area is transferred to the execution information storage area. 223q, shifts the data in the first pending information storage second area to the first pending information storage first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, the data in the first to fourth areas for storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information is stored in the area with the area number 1 smaller (execution information storage area 223q or It may be configured to shift to the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 35) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a special pattern fluctuation effect or continuous notice. It controls the performance.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 20 to 32. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in this embodiment) (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S156 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the increase mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device 504 starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. do. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start up in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 22), which will be described later.

The setting value command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The sound ramp control device 113 is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in the setting value memory 223d provided in the RAM 223 when receiving the setting value command (see FIG. 33). S1013 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S104 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the start-up mode is the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 in order to start up in the "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process (S116, S117) of RAM203 is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. be. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 conversion processing (S116, S117).

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first ball count counter 203a "0" clear, etc.) is set (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), setting change processing is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to FIG. 21, the setting change process (S118) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode". is the processing of

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 is set to start displaying the current probability setting value (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. Display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is started by the setting of starting the display of the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be always fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. That is, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or " It may be "4" or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability set values. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. . Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value " 3", and if the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off is less than "3", the display starts with the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off. may be made. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is high, such as "5" or "6," there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to repeat turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 so as to make the probability setting value approximately one cycle. On the other hand, if the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability set value with "3", the probability setting can be performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S122). If there is (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "6", which is the maximum probability setting value. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In updating the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value so far is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value so far is "6". , the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504. FIG.

The loop processing of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability set value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is performed. The process (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 20), the process moves to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). . In this way, in the process of S124, the hall personnel and the like are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased by having the hall personnel and the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 to fix the probability setting value. can be made

Further, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value is determined by detecting the RAM erase switch 503 being turned on, but the probability setting value may be determined by detecting the setting key 501 being turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach their maximum values ("9999" and "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S153) by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process described later, and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of normal symbols. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the general figure random number counter C4 that use these as the initial values for updating, It can be random.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. , the NMI interrupt process described later in FIG. 32 has been executed, so the power-off process after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S151 is executed at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S101). By setting to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 22), commands or signals to be sent to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processing. , when a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and the pachinko machine 10 are connected) A signal is output to an external output terminal plate (not shown), etc.). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission are transmitted to sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices), and the signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of winning each special symbol is executed ( S203). This winning process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After S203, a normal electric power control process for executing a drive control process for the normal electric power 64c is next executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. ◯ symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electrode 64c is opened for a predetermined period of time. remains closed.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Then, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per normal pattern are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per normal pattern are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (first implementation In the form, when reaching "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99") respectively, they are cleared to "0". Also, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number It is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, a starting prize winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is executed (S208). The details of the starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passage processing (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained. It is stored in a reserved ball storage area (not shown), and the reserved number of variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol reserved lamp 84 .

After executing the gate passing process (S209), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208) A special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), normal design determination is performed, and normal design variable display based on the determination result is performed in the normal design display device 83. A figure change process is executed (S211). In this normal figure fluctuation process (S211), according to the value or setting value of the time saving counter 203k or the time saving infinite flag 203m mentioned above, the probability of winning the normal symbol is high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1 /10). Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed based on the result of success or failure, and the display result corresponding to the result of success or failure is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 .

After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), the firing control processing is executed (S212), and further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) executes the processing to be periodically executed, and in the main processing, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). . For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing to read processing (S202), winning processing (S203), normal electric role control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205). ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S208).

In the start winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the first start opening 64a read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 23) , the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there has been a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a) It is determined whether or not the number N1 of active balls in dynamic display (variation effect) of one special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a winning to the first starting port 64a, if the number of balls N1 < 4 is not activated (S302: No), this starting winning processing (S208) is terminated, timer interruption processing (see FIG. 23) back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S303). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S304), and processing is performed. to S309.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64a (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S305). Here, as with the first start port 64a, the special figure 2 entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the second start port 64b, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 23) ), the ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S305: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of active balls in dynamic display (variation effect) of 2 special symbols is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S306). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 64b (S305: No), or even if there is a winning to the second starting port 64b, if the number of balls to be activated is not N2<4 (S306: No), this The start winning process (S208) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of activated balls <4 (S306: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second retained ball number counter 203b (number of activated retained balls N2) (S307). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S308), and processing is performed. to S309.

In the process of S309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6), and are set as storage destinations in S304 or S308. Among the first holding first to fourth areas or second holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e, the first holding ball storage area 203d is If specified as a storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S309). Also, when the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b is the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and the stop They are reserved (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S309).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S304 based on the winning to the first starting port 64a, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S303 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S308 based on the winning to the second starting port 64b, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the processing of S307 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first retained ball number counter 203a or the second retained ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S303 or S307 (the number of activated retained balls N1 or the number of activated retained balls N2), and the first A hold ball number command containing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e is voiced. In order to transmit it to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball count command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S310 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command in the process of S310 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S309. A read value stored (retained) in the ball storage area 203d or the second retained ball storage area 203e may be used.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S305, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b at the same time, the winning process of the ball to the first starting port 64a is preferentially executed, and the second starting port Waiting for the winning process of the ball to the opening 64b, and in the starting winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the waiting process of winning the ball to the second starting opening 64b is executed. can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special figure variation processing (S210) is to perform dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and control related to the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 201, in this special figure variation process (S210), firstly, determines whether or not one of the first special figure and the second special figure is in the jackpot at the moment (S401). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, during the jackpot opening), During a predetermined period of time after the jackpot game ends (that is, jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S401, if any special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot (S401: Yes), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is returned to.

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S401: No), next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamic display (S402), and the special symbol is determined. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not dynamic display (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. .

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S403, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S403: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (second special It is determined whether or not the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) operation suspension ball number N2) for the symbol is greater than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated ball N2) (S405). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S410) described later, and the second This is because the number of reserved balls related to special symbols is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S406). This data shift process (S406) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the second ball number counter 203b (the number of balls held in operation N2) is "0" (S404: No), then the first ball number counter 203a (actuation suspension ball number N1 of dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol suspended in main controller 110) is greater than "0" (S407). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) (S408). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the reserved first special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S410) to be described later. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S409). This data shift process (S409) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S406 or S409, the variation start process for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process. (S410), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Note that the fluctuation start process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S407: No), the third symbol display device 81 performs a demonstration effect. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S411). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a or the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N1 or The period until it is determined that any value of the number of held balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S411: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped, the third symbol display device 81 displays the demonstration effect.

If it is determined in the process of S411 that the demonstration is not being performed (S411: No), then a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S412 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the process of S402, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S413 ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If the (fluctuation time) has not passed (S413: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the special LED group 37b ( That is, a display mode is set in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is lit or extinguished in a predetermined lighting pattern.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S413: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S415). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S410), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S410), it is determined whether or not a big win is made according to the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f by the process of S406 or S409. The value of C2 determines the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, each lighting pattern corresponds to the type (type) of the jackpot. The LED group is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S415, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S416), and the process proceeds to S417 in order to synchronize and display the confirmation. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Upon receiving this confirmation command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopped symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display.

In the process of S417, the RAM 203 It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k provided in is greater than "0" (S417).

In the process of S417, if the value of the time saving counter 203k is not "0" (S417: Yes), it is a "time reduction state" or a "probability change state" in which the winning assist function is finite, and in that state Since the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol has been completed once, the value of the time reduction counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S418), this special symbol variation process (S210) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 23 ).

On the other hand, in the process of S417, if the value of the time reduction counter 203k is "0" (S417: No), the "time reduction state" or the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assist function is limited, but the "normal game state ", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning auxiliary function is infinite, so skip the processing of S418, end this special figure fluctuation processing (S210), timer interrupt processing ( 23).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the variation start process (S410), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S410). In this fluctuation start process (S410), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, a lottery (jackpot lottery) for a big hit or a loss is performed according to the game state, and special symbols are drawn. A dynamic display and a dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are determined. Also, when a big win is won, the type of big win is determined depending on whether or not the number of times of big win reaches the limit.

In the variation start process (S410), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S451). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (that is, OFF) (S451: No), the game state is "normal game state" or "time reduction state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is low. Since it is in the probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S452), and the process proceeds to S454. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is ON (S451: Yes), the gaming state is "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S453), and the process proceeds to S454.

In the process of S454, a jackpot lottery (whether judgment ) process (S454).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the set probability value. and the occasional game state (mode). As described above, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low-probability state ("normal game state" or "time reduction state"), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number is defined so that a value of "1" is 50/10000 and a set value of "6" is 60/10000. In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. ” is 500/10000, and the set value “6” is 600/10000.

In the process of S454, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot is awarded. It is determined that As a result of the process of S454, if it is determined that the jackpot is won (S454: Yes), then the number of winning times of the jackpot this time has reached the limit number after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after reaching the previous limit. In order to determine whether or not there is, limit processing is performed (S455).

Now, with reference to FIG. 27, the limit process (S455), which is one process of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 26) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this limit processing (S455).

In this limit process (S455), as described above, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after reaching the previous limit, until the number of jackpots reaches 6 times (that is, before reaching the limit), the special symbol has a high probability. A jackpot type table 202b is set in which a jackpot type for the jackpot can be selected from the jackpot types including the jackpot types that are in the state. On the other hand, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after reaching the previous limit, every time the number of jackpots reaches six times, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types that do not generate a high probability state of special symbols. A jackpot type table 202b from which the jackpot types can be selected is set.

In the limit process (S455), first, since it is determined in the process of S454 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 26) that the jackpot has been won, 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203h (S471). Then, a limit number command indicating that the limit counter 203h has been incremented by 1 is generated, and the limit number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S472). The limit number command set in S472 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When receiving the limit number command, the sound lamp control device 113 recognizes that one big win has occurred, and adds 1 to the value of the sub-limit counter 223e (see S1213 in FIG. 35). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of big hits based on the value of the sub-limit counter 223e, and executes control related to the "setting suggestion effect".

After the process of S472, it is then determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203h incremented by 1 in S471 is less than "6" (S473). As a result of the determination, if the value of the limit counter 203h is less than "6" (S473: Yes), the number of times of limit has not been reached in this big win, so the big win type table 202b before reaching the limit is set (S474 ), the limit processing (S455) is terminated. After the end of the limit process (S455), the process returns to the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S473 that the value of the limit counter 203h is not less than "6", that is, if it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203h is greater than or equal to "6" (S473: No), Since it means that the limit number of times has been reached in this jackpot, the jackpot type table 202b at the time of reaching the limit is set (S475), and this limit processing (S455) is finished. After the end of the limit process (S455), the process returns to the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 26).

In this way, the value of the limit counter 203h is updated each time a big win occurs, and the jackpot type is determined from among the jackpot types that can generate a high probability state of special symbols according to the value of the limit counter 203h, or By determining the jackpot type from among the jackpot types that cannot generate the high probability state of the special pattern, it is possible to always make the low probability state of the special pattern for each limit number of times of the jackpot, and the high probability state of the special pattern It is possible to suppress the occurrence of continuous and excessive jackpot "Renso".

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first special symbol before reaching the limit or when reaching the limit set in the limit process (S455), or the second before reaching the limit or when reaching the limit Based on the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the special symbol and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set (S456). ).

In this process, according to the jackpot type tables 202b1 and 202b2, after the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, the next jackpot Until the special pattern becomes a high probability state and the winning auxiliary function continues "probability change A", or after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the special pattern is in a high probability state and special "Probable variable B" in which the winning assistance function is effective until the pattern fluctuates 100 times, or "latent variable A" in which only the special pattern is in a high probability state until the next big hit after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, or the maximum round After the jackpot with the number of 4 rounds, the special pattern is in a low probability state, but until the special pattern fluctuates 100 times. It is discriminated whether it is "passing through A" which is in a low probability state and does not have a winning assisting function. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first held ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second held ball storage area 203e is determined by the held ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) of , and the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, The jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) set in S474 or S475. Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the above The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9) set in S474 or S475.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S457), and the process proceeds to S460. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A dynamic time (variation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 12) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Specifically, in the process of S457, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big hit, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f to select. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S454 that it is not a big hit (S454: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S458). In the processing of S458, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203f and the first retained ball number counter are set. 203a or (and) based on the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current game state, as the effect mode to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, "non-reach (Normal)" effect mode, "normal reach" effect mode, "super reach" effect mode, or "special reach" effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, each The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the effect mode is different.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S459), and the process proceeds to S460. In the process of S459, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S458, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win and the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. , the program can be shared, and the number of man-hours required for development can be reduced.

In the processing of S460, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S457 and S459, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S460). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is "variable probability A", and further, if the "25 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is selected, the jackpot / "variable probability A” and “25 seconds” variation pattern commands indicating “super reach” are set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the variation pattern of ``25 seconds'' and ``super reach'' is selected, a variation pattern command indicating loss and ``25 seconds'' of ``super reach'' is set. .

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in more detail based on the information.

In addition, the stop type set in the process of S456 or S458, set the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 (S461), special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 25 ).

Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "Probability A", without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, "7" symbol etc.), " Set a stop type command indicating that it is “probability variation A”. In addition, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "time saving A", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" pattern etc.) is not specified, and it is "time saving A". Set the stop type command indicating that

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the " Set a stop type command indicating that it is in the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is not specified, and the "normal reach" at the time of losing is selected. ” Set a stop type command indicating that the mode is the rendering mode. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" production mode.

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the result of stopping the variable presentation in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these A command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S203).

This winning process (S203) sets the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening 65a according to the type of the big winning when a special symbol big winning occurs, and also sets the opening time of the big winning opening 65a. . Then, in the case of the big winning state, the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509) for opening or closing the big winning opening 65a is executed, and the end of the big winning state is set at the timing when the big winning state ends. Processing (S511) is executed.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a big win is in progress (S501). As a result of determination, if the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbols has ended (S502). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbols has not ended (S502: No), the winning process (S203) is ended and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is returned to. If the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbols has ended (S502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S503).

As a result of the determination in S503, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S503: No), this winning process (S203) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23 reference). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S503: Yes), first, in order to control the winning jackpot, the number of rounds for the winning jackpot is 16R. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the jackpot type "probability variation A" has been won (S504).

As a result of the determination in S504, if the number of rounds for the winning jackpot is 16R (S504: Yes), the round counter is set to "16" in order to control the opening of the jackpot 65a 16 times in the main jackpot ( S505), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if the number of rounds for the winning jackpot is not 16R, that is, if the number of rounds for winning the jackpot is 4R (S504: No), rounds are performed to control the opening of the big winning port 65a four times in the main jackpot. "4" is set in the counter (S506), and the process proceeds to S507. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and if the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the value of the round counter is set to 1 while controlling the opening of the big winning opening 65a. Subtract. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot in progress is terminated.

In the process of S507, an opening time (for example, "10 seconds") for the jackpot is set (S507), and then an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The value is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S508), the winning process (S203) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot is already in progress (S501: Yes), a big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509) for controlling opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509). As described above, in the large winning opening opening/closing control process (S509), the opening/closing control of the large winning opening 65a is executed based on the number of openings of the large winning opening 65a set in the winning process (S203).

In this big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509), first, the opening time set in S507 of the winning process (S203), or the interval set in S540 (see FIG. 30) of the opening process (S527) to be described later. It is determined whether or not time has passed (S521). As a result of determination, if the opening time or the interval time has not passed (S521: No), it is not the time to open the big winning opening 65a, so the big winning opening 65a is kept closed, so the processing of S522 to S525 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S526.

On the other hand, in the process of S521, if the opening time or the interval time has passed (S521: Yes), it means that it is time to open the big winning opening 65a, so the opening setting of the big winning opening 65a is performed (S522), and then the winning counter is set. 203j is set to "10" (S523). Then, the maximum opening time ("30 seconds" in the first embodiment) of the big winning opening 65a is set (S524), an opening command indicating that the big winning opening 65a has been opened is generated, and stored in the RAM 203. It is set in the provided ring buffer for command transmission (S525), and the process proceeds to S526.

In the process of S526, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 65a is open (S526). As a result of the determination, if the big winning opening 65a is not open (S526: No), the big winning opening 65a is not open, but is during the opening time or the interval time, so the process of S527 is skipped. The big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the process of S526, if it is determined that the large winning opening 65a is open (S526: Yes), open processing is performed to determine the closing condition of the open large winning opening 65a (S527). ), this big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 28).

Now, with reference to FIG. 30, the opening process (S527), which is one process of the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the open process (S527). In this open process (S527), a process of determining whether or not the condition for closing the large winning opening 65a being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this opening process (S527), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in S524 of the above-described big winning opening opening/closing control process (S509) has elapsed (S531). As a result of determination, if the opening time of the large winning opening 65a has passed (S531: Yes), the conditions for closing the large winning opening 65a are satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 65a in the round. In order to clear the value of the counter 203j to "0" (S532) and close the big winning opening 65a, the process proceeds to S536. The process of closing the big winning opening 65a from S536 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S531, if it is not the time when the opening time of the large winning opening 65a has elapsed (S531: No), then whether or not the large winning opening switch (not shown) has been turned on, that is, whether or not the large winning opening It is determined whether or not the ball has entered 65a (S533).

In the process of S533, if the ball has won the big winning hole 65a (S533: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S534), and then the value of the winning counter 203j after subtracting 1 becomes "0". ” (S535). If the value of the winning counter 203j is not greater than "0" (S535: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter 203j is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls have won the big winning opening 65a. Since the conditions for closing the big winning opening 65a are satisfied, the process proceeds to S536 in order to close the big winning opening 65a.

In the processing of S533, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the big winning opening 65a (S533: No), or in the processing of S535, the value of the winning counter 203j is greater than "0". If it is determined (S535: Yes), the conditions for closing the large winning opening 65a are not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the large winning opening 65a, the processing of S536 to S540 is skipped and this opening is performed. The intermediate processing (S527) is ended. After the opening process (S527) ends, the process returns to the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 29).

In the process of closing the large winning opening 65a from S536, first, the closing setting of the large winning opening 65a is performed (S536), and then a closing command indicating that the large winning opening 65a is closed is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. is set (S537), and the process proceeds to S538. Note that the close command set in the process of S537 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and will be , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S538, since one round of the big winning opening 65a has been completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter 203i (S538), and the value of the round counter 203i obtained by subtracting 1 is greater than "0". It is determined whether or not (S539). When the value of the round counter 203i is greater than "0" (S539: Yes), the number of rounds in the big win (the number of times the big winning port 65a is left open) remains, so the next big winning. An interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the opening of the opening 65a is set (S540), the process during opening (S527) is terminated, and the process returns to the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 29).

On the other hand, in the process of S539, if the value of the round counter 203i is not greater than "0" (S539: No), that is, if the value of the round counter 203i is less than or equal to "0", the big winning opening for this big win Since all the opening operations of 65a have been completed, the interval time is not set (that is, S540 is skipped) in order to end the jackpot state, and this opening process (S527) is terminated to open and close the big winning opening. Return to the control process (see FIG. 29).

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 28, the description is continued. After the big winning opening opening/closing control process of S509 (see FIG. 29) ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter 203i is greater than "0" (S510). As a result of the determination, if the value of the round counter 203i is greater than "0" (S510: Yes), in order to continue the big win state, the process of S511, which is the big win end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203 ).

On the other hand, in the process of S510, if the value of the round counter 203i is not greater than "0" (S510: No), that is, if the value of the round counter 203i is less than or equal to "0", the big winning opening for this big win Since all the opening operations of 65a have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, jackpot end processing is performed (S511), and this hit processing (S203) is ended.

Here, the jackpot ending process (S511), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S511). In this jackpot end processing (S511), based on the winning jackpot type, the variable probability flag 203g, the time saving counter 203k or the time saving infinite flag 203m are set, and when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times, the limit The number of times is cleared to "0" and the process of initializing the limit number of times of jackpot is executed.

In this jackpot ending process (S511), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of this time was the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B" or "latent probability variation A" (S551). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is "variable probability A", "variable probability B" or "variable latent probability A" (S551: Yes), the game state after the end of the jackpot is changed to a high probability of special symbols until the next big hit occurs. In order to set the state, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S554. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B" or "latency variable A" (S551: No), it is the winning of the jackpot type "time saving A" or "passing A", after the end of the jackpot In order to make the game state of , the special symbol low probability state until the next big hit occurs, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF (S553), and the process proceeds to S554.

Next, in the processing of S554, it is determined whether or not the winning jackpot is the jackpot type "probability variation B" or "time saving A" (S554). As a result of the determination, if the winning jackpot is the jackpot type "probability variable B" or "time saving A" (S554: Yes), the winning auxiliary function is operated until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times as the game state after the jackpot ends. In order to do so, the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to "100" (S555), and the process proceeds to S557. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot type "probable variable B" or "short time A" (S554: No), the jackpot type "probable variable A", "latency variable A" or "pierce A" is won and is a finite prize In order to deactivate the auxiliary function, the value of the time saving counter 203k is cleared to "0" (S556), and the process proceeds to S557.

In the processing of S557, it is determined whether or not the winning jackpot is the jackpot type "probability variable A" (S557). As a result of the determination, if the winning jackpot is the jackpot type "probability variable A" (S557: Yes), as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the time saving infinite flag 203m is set to operate the winning auxiliary function until the next jackpot occurs. is turned on (S558), and the process proceeds to S560. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot type "variable probability A" (S557: No), the jackpot type "variable probability B", "variable latent probability A", "time saving A" or "through A" is elected, so the time saving infinite flag 203m is set to off (S559), and the process proceeds to S560.

Thus, in the jackpot end processing (S511), by setting the probability variable flag 203g, the time-saving counter 203k, and the time-saving infinite flag 203m based on the winning jackpot type, various game states can be started with the jackpot end as a trigger. can be done.

Next, in the process of S560, it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203h is less than "6" (S560). The value of the limit counter 203h is updated (1 is added) at the start of fluctuation when winning a jackpot (see S471 in FIG. 27). , "6" or more and has reached the limit number of times (S560: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203h is cleared to "0" in order to initialize the jackpot limit number of times (S561), and the limit counter A limit clear command indicating that the value of 203h has been initialized (that is, that the limit number of times has been initialized) is generated, and the limit clear command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. (S562), the process proceeds to S563. The limit clear command set in S562 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When receiving the limit clear command, the audio lamp control device 113 recognizes that the jackpot limit count has been initialized, and clears the value of the sub-limit counter 223e to "0" (see S1215 in FIG. 35). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of big hits based on the value of the sub-limit counter 223e, and executes control related to the "setting suggestion effect".

In the process of S560, if the value of the limit counter 203h is less than "6" (S560: Yes), the limit number of times has not yet been reached, so the processes of S561 and S562 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S563. Move to

Thus, in the jackpot ending process (S511), when the jackpot limit number of times has been reached, by initializing the limit number of times, it is possible to execute an effect when the limit is reached while the jackpot is being executed. After the end of the big win, the number of big wins can be counted from the initial value of the limited number of times.

In the process of S563, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S563). The ending command set in the process of S563 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the ending flag 223n to ON in order to execute the ending effect of the jackpot (see S1233 in FIG. 36). Then, the sound ramp control device 113 executes an effect during the jackpot ending period based on the set value of the ending flag 223n.

After the end of the process of S563, a jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time etc. is performed (S564), this jackpot end process (S511) is ended, and the process returns to the win process (see FIG. 28).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 .

The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 33) that is activated upon power-on, and main processing (see FIG. 34) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 33, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. 34) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 34), it executes power-off processing in S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

Further, in the process of S1002, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S1002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after a momentary power failure and during execution of the power-off process of S1116. Then, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 34). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), an interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). When a set value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the set value memory 223d, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 34).

In this manner, in the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113, the main processing (see FIG. 34) is started until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 20) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability set value set by the main controller 110, and the main processing and subsequent processing can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main controller 110, the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not reached the final stage, and the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not ended normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not terminated normally, and the process is not shifted to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp whether or not the start-up processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a non-existent state.

In the process of S1012, a process of waiting until a set value command is received from the main controller 110 is performed. is powered off and the main controller 110 continues to be powered on, the audio lamp controller 113 may repeatedly execute the processing of S1012 and may not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, if no set value command is received from the main controller 110 for a predetermined period of time, the sound lamp control device 113 does not execute control related to the set value and starts other controls in a safe mode. may be configured to launch the

Next, referring to FIG. 34, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No). , S1102 to S1109 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1110. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short period (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable effect processing of S1110 This is because the command determination processing in step S1111 is preferable to be executed in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the process of S1111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short period, the command determination process Based on the command received by, the setting regarding the variable effect can be performed without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . It should be noted that if it is not at the time of power-on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process for executing a jackpot-related effect set by the command determination process of S1111, which will be described later, is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. This jackpot effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variable effect is not executed or during the period of the "high-speed change" variable element, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the back image change command for the device 114 . By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable production, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display", the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be changed to a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect from a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable effect process which is a process for starting the variable effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 to run. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation effect process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters such as the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1112). Specifically, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is "99", the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is cleared to "0" when it reaches "9").

The setting suggestion lottery counter 223f updated here is used to select whether or not the "setting suggestion effect" is executed during the big win, and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is used when the "setting suggestion effect" execution lottery is won. , is used to select the contents (type and notification timing) of the "setting suggestion effect".

When the process of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 39) described later, a display variation pattern for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type to the display control device 114 is displayed. Used to set commands. After that, the command determination processing (S1111) is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 34) is returned to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and when setting a display stop type command for notifying the stop type of the variable effect to the display control device 114 in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 39) described later. used for Thereafter, the variable start flag 223a indicating the start of the variable effect is set to ON (S1206), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 34) is returned to.

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S1206, in the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 39) to be executed later, extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance received matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance extracted from the received variation pattern command. In addition, whether or not the variable effect stop type extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command matches the variable effect stop type extracted from the received stop type command judgment is made. As a result of those determinations, in one variation production, if the variation pattern based on the number of pending balls command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the number of pending balls command If it does not match the stop type based on the above, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

As a result of the process of S1204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time for the "time reduction state" to end (S1208). This determination may be made by counting the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed by a sub time-saving counter (not shown), and determining whether or not the dynamic display is performed 100 times after the big hit. This may be done by a state command or the like from the device 110 indicating the end of the "time reduction state". As a result of determination, when it is determined that the "time reduction state" has ended (S1208: Yes), the game state has changed from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state", so the so-called withdrawal period ends. Therefore, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is cleared to "0" (S1209), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time when the "time reduction state" ends (S1208: No), the process of S1209 is skipped, the command determination process (S1111) ends, and the main process (Fig. 34 ).

In this way, when the "time reduction state" ends, the pullback counter 223h is cleared to "0" to initialize the number of pullbacks. By constructing in this way, how to pull back the jackpot while the pullback counter 223h is not initialized (that is, during the pullback period), and while obtaining the game value due to the jackpot, the execution of the ``setting suggesting performance''. It is possible to increase the interest of the game during the pullback period by creating a game property that increases the probability and accuracy.

As a result of the process of S1207, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (S1210). Then, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the main controller 110's first pending ball number counter 203a and/or second pending ball number counter 203b ( (see FIG. 5) (that is, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol fluctuation effect reserved in the main control device 110) is extracted, and this is the sub-th of the voice lamp control device 113 It is stored in the 1-reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c (S1211). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the reserved ball number command, are updated in S1211 to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b. Or the first pending information storage first to fourth areas of the first pending information storage area 223o indicated by the value of the sub-second pending ball number counter 223c, or the second pending information storage first of the second pending information storage area 223p to the fourth area (S1212), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (starting winning), so every time there is a starting winning , S1212, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 or the second It can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the sub-first ball counter 223b and/or the second ball counter 223c Or even if it deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. , the values of the first reserved ball number counter 203 a and/or the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first pending information storage area 223o or the second pending information storage area 223p. there is That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, Execution of various effects can be determined.

As a result of the process of S1210, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not the limit number command has been received (S1213). If the command for the limit number of times has been received (S1213: Yes), it means that one big win has occurred. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 34).

As a result of the process of S1213, if it is determined that the limit number command has not been received (S1213: No), then it is determined whether or not the limit clear command has been received (S1215). Then, if the limit clear command has been received (S1215: Yes), it means that the number of times of the jackpot limit has been cleared, so the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is cleared to "0" (S1216), and this command determination process is performed. (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the limit counter 203h stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of special symbol jackpots based on the command (limit number command or limit clear command) related to the number of jackpots transmitted from the main controller 110, and the sub limit counter 223e , the number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 is managed.

As a result of the process of S1215, if it is determined that the limit clear command has not been received (S1215: No), then whether or not a command related to the jackpot, that is, an opening command, an opening command, a closing command, or an ending command, has been received. (S1217). Then, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S1217: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1219), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the main Return to the process (see FIG. 34). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is to be used in the display control device 114, the command is set to the display control device 114 . For example, the demo command received from the main control unit 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1219, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then output as a command for the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by processing (S1102).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1217, when it is determined that a command related to the big win has been received (S1217: Yes), the process moves to the big win command process (S1218) in order to execute the process according to the command related to the big win. After the jackpot command process is finished, the command determination process (S1111) is finished and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the jackpot command process (S1218) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the jackpot command process (S1218). In this jackpot command process (S1218), as described above, a process based on the jackpot-related commands (opening command, opening command, closing command, ending command, etc.) received from main controller 110 is executed.

In this jackpot command process (S1218), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1221: Yes), the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to ON in order to start the jackpot effect (S1222), and the process proceeds to S1223. do. By turning on the jackpot effect flag 223k in S1222, various effects at the time of the jackpot can be executed in the jackpot effect processing (see FIG. 38) described later.

In the process of S1223, the jackpot type of the jackpot is the jackpot type “latency probability change A”, “time reduction A” or “rush A” (hereinafter, jackpot type “latency probability change A”, “time reduction A” or “rush A ” may be collectively referred to as “disadvantageous win”) (S1223). As a result of determination, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is a disadvantageous hit (S1223: Yes), the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is set to ON (S1224), and the process proceeds to S1226. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not a disadvantageous win (S1223: No), that is, when the winning jackpot type is "probable variable A" or "probable variable B", the disadvantageous hit flag 223g is set to OFF. (S1225), the process proceeds to S1226.

Next, in the process of S1226, it is determined whether or not the big win has reached the limit number of times during the pullback period (S1226). This determination is made when the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "6" and the value of the sub-time-saving counter (not shown) that counts the number of time-savings in the audio lamp control device 113 indicates the "time-saving state". (For example, if "100" is set when entering the "time reduction state", and 1 is subtracted for each execution of the special symbol variation effect, the value of the sub time reduction counter is greater than "0", etc.) , the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot that has reached the limit number of times during the pullback period, otherwise (for example, the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is other than "6", or If the value is "0" or the like), it is determined that the jackpot has not reached the limit number of times during the pullback period.

As a result of the determination in S1226, if it is determined that the jackpot has reached the limit number of times during the pullback period (S1226: Yes), then whether the value of the pullback counter 223h is smaller than "2" It is determined whether or not (S1227), and if the value of the pullback counter 223h is smaller than "2" (S1227), 1 is added to the value of the pullback counter 223h (S1228), and the process proceeds to S1229. On the other hand, if the value of the pullback counter 223h is not less than "2" (S1227: No), that is, if the value of the pullback counter 223h is "2" or more, the value of the pullback counter 223h has already reached the maximum value. Therefore, the process of S1228 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1229.

In the processing of S1226, when it is determined that the jackpot has not reached the limit number of times during the pullback period (S1226: No), the processing of S1227 and S1228 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1229.

In the process of S1229, the values of the disadvantageous hit flag 223g and the withdrawal counter 223h set in the processes of S1224 to S1228, and the values of the set value memory 223d and the sub-limit counter 223e set in the processes before that. is used to execute the setting suggestion lottery process for executing the "setting suggestion effect" execution lottery and its content and timing lottery (S1229). After the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) is executed, the jackpot command process (S1218) is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35).

Here, the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this setting suggestion lottery process (S1229). This setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) is executed in the jackpot command process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. A lottery for the content (type and notification timing) is executed.

In the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229), first, based on the values of the pullback counter 223h, the disadvantageous win flag 223g, the sub-limit counter 223e, and the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f, the setting suggestion lottery table 222e (see FIG. 17). , a lottery for execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is performed (S1241), and the process proceeds to S1242.

In the process of S1242, it is determined whether or not the lottery for execution of the "setting suggestion effect" in the process of S1241 has been won (S1242). S1242: Yes), then, based on the respective values of the withdrawal counter 223h, the setting value memory 223d, and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i, the suggestion content lottery table 222f (see FIG. 18) is used to determine the "setting suggestion effect". The type and notification timing are selected by lottery (S1243). Then, data on the type of "setting suggestion effect" determined in S1243 and the notification timing are set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j (S1244), the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) is terminated, and the jackpot command process ( 36).

The sound lamp control device 113 executes the "setting suggestion effect" in the later-described jackpot effect process (S1105, see FIG. 38) based on the setting suggestion content memory 223j set in the process of S1244.

In the process of S1242, if it is determined that the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" has not been won (S1242: No), the processes of S1243 and S1244 are skipped, and this setting suggestion lottery process (S1229). and return to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 36).

Returning to FIG. 36, the description is continued. In the processing of S1221, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1230). As a result of the determination, if the open command is received (S1230: Yes), it means that the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot has been updated, so the value of the sub-round counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S1231), and this jackpot command processing ( S1218) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35). The sound ramp control device 113 grasps the number of rounds of the jackpot that is being executed from the value of the sub-round counter 223m, and executes various effects (for example, "setting suggestion effect", etc.).

As a result of the process of S1230, if the opening command has not been received (S1230: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1232). As a result of determination, if the ending command is received (S1232: Yes), the ending flag 223n is set to ON (S1233) in order to execute the jackpot end effect, and then the value of the sub-round counter 223m is changed. "0" is cleared (S1234), this jackpot command process (S1218) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35). Based on the setting value of the ending flag 223n, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps whether or not it is the timing of the ending at the time of the big win, and executes various effects (for example, "setting suggestion effect", etc.).

As a result of the processing of S1232, if the ending command has not been received (S1232: No), command processing related to other jackpots (for example, processing corresponding to the closing command, etc.) is executed (S1235), and this jackpot command processing ( S1218) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35).

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this jackpot effect processing (S1105). This jackpot effect processing (S1105) is executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the sound lamp control device 113, and when the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to ON based on the reception of the opening command. Then, each processing related to the performance at the time of the big hit is performed.

In this jackpot effect processing (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to ON (S1301). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot effect flag 223k is not set to ON (S1301: No), the jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34). On the other hand, when the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to ON (S1301: Yes), the process is shifted to S1302 in order to execute the jackpot effect because the jackpot is in progress.

In the process of S1302, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" and the number of rounds for the jackpot match (S1302). This determination is made when the data regarding the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is a value corresponding to the sub-round counter 223m (for example, when the data regarding the notification timing is "3"). number is 3 rounds, etc.). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" and the number of rounds of the jackpot match (S1302: Yes), it is determined that the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" has arrived, and the setting suggestion content is determined. Execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is set according to the type (content) of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the memory 223j (S1303), the jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated, and the main process (FIG. 34) is executed. ). In addition, in the process of S1302, when the determination of S1302: Yes is performed even once, the determination of S1302: Yes is not performed again in the jackpot effect processing (S1105) in the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if it is determined that the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" does not match the number of rounds for the jackpot (S1302: No), then whether or not the ending flag 223n is turned on. is determined (S1304). As a result of determination, if the ending flag 223n is turned on (S1304: Yes), the ending flag 223n is set to off (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not "ending" is set as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" (S1306). This determination is made depending on whether or not the data regarding the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is a value indicating the "ending". As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the "ending" is set as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" (S1306: Yes), the process proceeds to S1303, and the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" arrives. Then, it executes and sets the "setting suggestion effect" according to the type (content) of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j (S1303).

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if the "ending" is not set as the execution timing of the "set-suggesting effect" (S1306: No), then although the lottery for executing the "set-suggesting effect" is won, It is determined whether or not the timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds has not arrived (S1307).

Specifically, for this determination, for example, 5 rounds were set as the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect", but since the jackpot type that was won was the 4R jackpot, the 5th round was executed in the jackpot. If not, it is determined that the timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds has not arrived (did not occur).

In the process of S1307, if it is determined that the timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds has not arrived (S1307: Yes), the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is set. In order to change and execute the "setting suggesting effect" in the ending effect, the process proceeds to S1303, it is assumed that the notification timing of the "setting suggesting effect" has arrived, and the "setting Execution setting of the "set suggesting effect" corresponding to the type (content) of the suggesting effect" is performed (S1303). In the process of S1307, if there is a timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds, or if "setting suggestion effect" is set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j in the first place. If not (not won) (S1307: No), the jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

In this way, even if the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" is won, when the winning of the jackpot type in which the initially set number of rounds is not executed, the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is changed. By executing a change process, a ``setting suggestion performance'' is surely executed in an ending performance that can be executed in all jackpot types. Therefore, without changing the video development or software development at the time of model development, while executing the game property of ``executing the ``setting suggestion effect'' in the round corresponding to the setting value of the probability setting value, if the corresponding round is If it does not exist, the "setting suggesting effect" is executed in the ending effect, so that the winning "setting suggesting effect" can be surely executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the processing of S1304, when it is determined that the ending flag 223n is not turned on (S1304: No), next, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the big win state, that is, whether or not the ending period has ended. (S1308). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot state (S1308: Yes), the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to OFF (S1309), and then the value of the setting suggestion content memory 223j is initialized (for example, , Null data is written) (S1310), the jackpot effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

In the process of S1308, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big win state (S1308: No), other processes related to the big win effect are executed (S1311), and this big win effect process (S1105) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1110). This variation production process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and various processes for executing the variation production in the third symbol display device 81 are executed.

In the fluctuation effect process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect The process (S1110) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402), then, it is determined whether or not the variable effect to be executed this time relates to the first special symbol (S1403). As a result of determination, if it is a variable effect related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data contained in the first reserved information storage first area provided in the first reserved information storage area 223o is transferred to the execution information storage area 223q. (S1404), and further, the data contained in the first pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223o are shifted to the first pending information storage first to third areas. (S1405), 1 is subtracted from the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information first area corresponding to the variable effect that has been executed are stored in the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the variable effect being executed. It is moved to each of the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the fourth area for storing the first pending information are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the third area for storing the first pending information.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223q stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. The to fourth areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the first to fourth areas in the first to fourth area 203d of the main controller 110. become.

On the other hand, in the process of S1403, if it is determined that it is not a variation effect related to the first special symbol, that is, if it is determined that it is a variation effect related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the second reservation information storage area 223p is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q (S1407). -The data contained in the fourth area is shifted to the second reserved information storage first to third areas (S1408), the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. Transition.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information first area corresponding to the variable effect that has been executed are stored in the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the variable effect being executed. It is moved to each of the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223q stores the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. In the ~4th area, the same values as those of the counters C1~C3, CS1 stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 are stored. become.

Next, in the process of S1410, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223q, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired (S1410). Thereafter, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 34). be. The display control device 114 starts the display control of the variation effect so that the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1412, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223q, the stop type of the variable effect to be executed from now on is obtained (S1412). After that, based on the obtained stop type of the variable effect, a stop type command for display is set (S1413), the variable effect process (S1110) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 34). be. The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1411 is to be displayed. do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, the "setting suggestion effect" in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 40, a case will be described where the "set suggestion effect" of the "immediate price suggestion" is executed at the timing of the "round match" when the probability set value is set to "6". FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a case where "round match" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", and FIG. FIG. 40(b) is a diagram showing the derived state, and FIG. 40(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is started from the state of FIG. 40(a) and the fifth round is being performed; (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot game progresses from the state of (c) and the 7th round is performed. 40(a) to 40(d), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted (the same applies to the descriptions of FIGS. 41, 42 and 47 below).

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the main display area Dm includes a left display area Dm1 (left symbol row Z1; hereinafter the same), a middle display area Dm2 (middle symbol row Z2; hereinafter the same), and a right display area. In Dm3 (right symbol row Z3; hereinafter the same), the third symbol of each "6" symbol is displayed in a stopped state. That is, it indicates that a big hit by the "6" symbol is derived in the variable effect.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is happy that the big win result has been derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. A line display is displayed in which the pattern is praising the player, saying "You did it!". A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 40(b), the jackpot game is started from the situation of FIG. 40(a), the jackpot game progresses, and the entire main display region Dm is enlarged, and the sub display region Ds etc. disappears. It is In the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, any one of a plurality of character patterns showing the occurrence of a big win by a variable effect or the like appears in each corresponding round, and in FIG. A character pattern appears, and an effect is executed as if the uncle character pattern is pleased with the occurrence of the big win.

Also, in the upper left part of the main display area Dm, there is formed a jackpot symbol display area in which a pattern display indicating the type of the third symbol that caused the current jackpot game is displayed. FIG. 40(b) shows a state in which "6" symbols are displayed in the jackpot symbol display area. Therefore, the player can confirm the third symbol that caused the big win during the big win game by the symbol display displayed in the big win symbol display area, and plays the game while guessing the game state after the big win game is over. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, a round number display area for displaying the current number of rounds is formed in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 40(b), a character display of "round" indicating that the round is displayed in the round number display area, and a numerical display of "5" indicating the current round number are displayed immediately below the character display. ing. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 40(b), it is suggested that the jackpot game of the 5th round is being performed. Therefore, the player can grasp the progress of the jackpot game currently being played by the round display in the round number display area.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, on the lower side of the number-of-rounds display area, the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game, that is, not only the number of prize balls won in the big prize opening 65a, but also the general prize opening 63 , the number-of-balls display area is formed to display the total number of balls awarded based on the winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (see FIG. 3 for both). In FIG. 40(b), a display of the total number of prize balls capable of displaying a four-digit number "0643 shots" is displayed in the number of prize balls display area.

The breakdown of the 643 prize balls in FIG. 40(b) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the first round to the fourth round: 10×15 prize balls×4 rounds=600 shots, 5 rounds 2 prizes to the main prize-winning port 65a x 15 prize balls = 30 shots, 1 prize-winning to the general prize-winning port 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 3 prizes to the second starting port 64b × 1 award ball = 3, total 643 shots.

In this way, the player can grasp the number of prize balls (game value) obtained in the jackpot game currently being performed by the display of the total number of prize balls displayed in the display area for the number of prize balls. You can feel an uplifting feeling and a sense of accomplishment associated with the increase in the number of awarded balls. In addition, in FIG. 40(b), since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the display of the total number of prize balls displayed in the display area for the number of prize balls is in a general font (for example, Gothic typeface. Hereinafter, It is sometimes referred to as a “general font”).

Next, FIG. 40(c) shows a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the situation of FIG. 40(b) and the sixth round jackpot game is being executed. Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a girl character pattern different from the character pattern of FIG. be done. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm shows a state in which the symbol display of "6" is displayed, as in FIG. 40(b).

In addition, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round display of "6" is displayed as the round advances by one from FIG. 40(b). That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 40(c), the round display of "6" suggests that the jackpot game of the 6th round is being performed.

Furthermore, in the number-of-balls display area of the main display area Dm, the total number of balls awarded is displayed as "0764 shots". At this time, as the "immediate value suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect" at the probability setting value "6", only the font of "6" indicating the tens place in the display of the total number of winning balls of "0764 shots" is a special typeface font is displayed in

The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 40(c) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the 1st round to the 5th round: 10×15 prize balls×5 rounds=750 shots, 6 rounds 0 prizes to the main prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 0 shots, 1 prize to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 4, total 764 shots.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "immediate value suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect", the font of the same number as the probability setting value is changed from the general font to the special typeface font in the display of the total number of winning balls. It is configured. Specifically, for example, if the probability setting value is "4", when the number "4" appears, the font of the number is changed from the general font to the special typeface font, and the probability setting value is "6", when the number "6" appears, the font of the number is changed from the general font to the special typeface font.

In addition, in the "456 suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect", if the probability setting value is "4", "5" or "6", the total prize number display is "4", "5" and "6" ” is configured to change the font of the numbers from the general font to the special typeface font.

Furthermore, in the "1 negative suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect", when the probability setting value is other than "1", that is, when the probability setting value is "2" to "6", the total number of winning balls It is configured to change the font of the numbers "2" to "6" from the general font to the special typeface font in the display.

In addition, in the "even-odd suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect", if the probability setting value is an odd number (that is, "1", "3" or "5"), "1" is displayed in the total number of prize balls displayed. , "3" and "5" numbers are changed from general fonts to special typeface fonts, and if the probability setting value is an even number (i.e., "2", "4" or "6"), It is configured to change the font of the numbers "2", "4" and "6" from the general font to the special typeface font in the display of the total number of winning balls.

With this configuration, the player can preliminarily indicate that the special typeface font indicates the probability setting value when the special typeface font appears in the display of the total number of winning balls displayed during the jackpot game. By visually recognizing this special typeface font on the condition that it is recognized, it is possible to grasp or guess that the number indicated by the special typeface font is the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the "1 negative suggestion" and "even-odd suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect", the numbers "0" or "7" to "9" also mean even or odd numbers, or numbers greater than 1. , The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to execute the "setting suggestion effect" only with numbers in the range of "1" to "6" used as probability setting values. In other words, numbers not used in the probability settings are represented only in normal font. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the expression range of the "setting suggesting effect", increase the rarity of the "setting suggesting effect", and enhance the effect of the "setting suggesting effect".

In the state shown in FIG. 40(c), in the display of the total number of winning balls "0764 shots" in the 6th round, only the portion of "6" in the tens place is displayed in a special typeface font, and the other numbers are displayed in a general font. is displayed. For this reason, a player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, first, if it is "1 negative suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", "2 , that is, both "6" and "4" must be special typeface fonts, but in FIG. 40(c), only "6" is a special typeface font. understand that there is no

Next, if it is "even-odd suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", both even numbers of "6" and "4" in the total number of winning balls display of "0764 shots" must be special typeface fonts. , in FIG. 40(c), only "6" is a special typeface font, so it is understood that it is not "even-odd suggestion".

Next, in the case of the ``456 suggestion'' effect of the ``setting suggestion effect'', both the numbers ``6'' and ``4'' in the display of the total number of winning balls of ``0764 shots'' must be in a special typeface font. However, in FIG. 40(c), only "6" is a special typeface font, so it is understood that it is not "456 suggestion".

Next, if it is "immediate price suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one of the total number of winning balls display of "0764 shots" is displayed in a special typeface font, as shown in FIG. 40(c). , only the number "6" is displayed in a special typeface font, so it can be grasped that the "immediate value suggestion" in the probability setting value "6" applies provisionally.

Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 40(c), only "immediate price suggestion" is applied as the "setting suggestion effect", so the player understands that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "6". be able to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game while guessing in which round the "setting suggesting effect" will be performed or not. In addition to estimating what kind of ``set suggesting effect'' is, the playability of estimating the probability setting value from the content can be created, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the rounds in which the "setting suggestion effect" can be performed, the total number of winning balls that easily reflects the contents of the "setting suggestion effect" can be easily grasped. can. Specifically, numbers unrelated to the probability setting values "1" to "6" used in the pachinko machine 10, that is, numbers "0", "7" to "9" "Suggestive production" cannot be expressed.

Therefore, instead of "0", "7" to "9" which are not used as probability setting values, the contents of the numerical display of the total number of prize balls display are "1" to "6" which are used as probability setting values. By displaying the total number of winning balls including , it is possible to accurately reflect the content of the "setting suggestion effect" in the display of the total number of winning balls. For example, in a state where the total number of prize balls display including "4", "5" and "6" (for example, "0456 shots", "0564 shots", "0654 shots" etc.) is displayed ' is executed, if '4', '5' and '6' are displayed in a special typeface font, the 'setting suggestion effect' is '456 suggestion' or '1 negative suggestion' If "4" and "6" are displayed in a special typeface font, it can be understood that it is "even-odd suggestion", and only one number (for example, only the number "6") is special When displayed in a typeface font, it can be understood that it is a "direct value suggestion".

On the other hand, in the case of the total number of winning balls display including the numerical display of "0", "7" to "9", even if the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, any "setting suggestion effect" Even if it is executed, there are cases where the content of the "setting suggestion effect" cannot be expressed.

Therefore, the player is given the opportunity to determine how to display the total number of balls to be awarded so that the content of the "setting suggestion effect" can be accurately reflected. , the general prize winning port 63, the first starting port 64a and/or the second starting port 64b, the game can be played while the balls are winning, and the contents of the ``set suggestion performance'' are likely to be accurately reflected. The amusement of the game can be enhanced by the playability of whether or not the number display of "1" to "6" is included in the display.

In addition, the display of the total number of winning balls in the 6th round in FIG. If there are no winnings to the big winning opening 65a, "0764 shots", if there is one winning to the big winning opening 65a, "0779 shots", and if there are two winnings to the big winning opening 65a, " "0794 shots", "0809 shots" when 3 prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a, "0824 shots" when 4 prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a, 5 prizes in the big prize opening 65a In the case of "0839 shots", "0854 shots" when there are 6 prizes to the big prize mouth 65a, "0869 shots" when there are 7 prizes to the big prize mouth 65a, "0869 shots" to the big prize mouth 65a "0884 shots" are displayed when there are 8 prizes, "0899 shots" are displayed when 9 prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a, and "0914 shots" are displayed when 10 prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a. be. Therefore, when the probability setting value is "6", in the "immediate value suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect" in the 6th round, when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 65a is 0 and when 7 , the special typeface font "6", which is the "immediate value suggestion", appears.

Also, when 10 prizes have been won in the big prize opening 65a, the jackpot game of the sixth round ends. (for example, 3 seconds), the display of the special typeface font as the "setting suggestion effect" is maintained. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably execute the "setting suggesting effect" in the round in which the "setting suggesting effect" has been won.

Next, FIG. 40(d) shows a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the situation of FIG. 40(c) and the seventh round jackpot game is being executed. Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a boy character pattern different from the character patterns shown in FIGS. A production such as is executed. It should be noted that, in the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm, the symbol display of "6" is displayed as in FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c).

In addition, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round display of "7" is displayed as one round advances from FIG. 40(c). That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 40(d), the round display of "7" suggests that the jackpot game of the 7th round is being performed.

Furthermore, in the number-of-balls display area of the main display area Dm, the display of the number of total number of prize balls is displayed as "0914 shots". In addition, in FIG. 40(d), since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the total number of prize balls displayed in the number of prize balls display area is expressed in a normal font.

The breakdown of the 914 prize balls in FIG. 40(d) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the 1st round to the 6th round: 10×15 prize balls×6 rounds=900 shots, 7 rounds 0 prizes to the main prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 0 shots, 1 prize to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 4, total 914 shots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the case where the "even-odd suggestion" and "set-suggestion rendering" are executed at the timing of the "other round" when the probability set value is set to "6" will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a case where "another round" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", and FIG. FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing a derived state, and FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is started from the state of FIG. 41(a) and the fourth round is performed; (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the "setting suggestion effect" is executed in the fifth round after the jackpot game progresses from the state of FIG. 41(b), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot game progresses from the state of (c) and the 6th round is performed.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), in the left display area Dm1, the middle display area Dm2, and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of "6" is displayed in a stopped state. . That is, it indicates that a big hit by the "6" symbol is derived in the variable effect.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is happy that the big win result has been derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. A line display is displayed in which the pattern is praising the player, saying "You did it!". A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 41(b), the jackpot game is started from the situation of FIG. 41(a), the jackpot game progresses, and as the entire main display region Dm is expanded, the sub display region Ds etc. disappears. It is In the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, one of a plurality of character designs appearing in a variable effect or the like appears in each corresponding round, and in FIG. An effect is executed as if the boy character is pleased with the fact that the big win has occurred.

Also, in the jackpot symbol display area, a state in which "6" symbols are displayed is shown. Furthermore, in the round number display area, the number "4" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot game of the fourth round is being performed.

In addition, a display of the total number of prize balls capable of displaying a 4-digit number "0562 shots" is displayed in the number of prize balls display area. The breakdown of the 562 prize balls in FIG. 41(b) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the first round to the third round: 10×15 prize balls×3 rounds=450 shots, 4 rounds The number of prizes won to the first big prize hole 65a×15 prize balls=90, the number of prizes to the general prize hole 63×2x10 prize balls=20, 2 prizes to the second starting hole 64b × 1 award ball = 2, total 562 shots.

In addition, in FIG. 41(b), since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the total number of prize balls displayed in the number of prize balls display area is expressed in a normal font.

Next, FIG. 41(c) shows a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the situation of FIG. 41(b) and the fifth round jackpot game is being executed. Here, an uncle character design different from the character design shown in FIG. 41(b) appears in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed as if the uncle character is happy that the big win has occurred. be done. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm shows the state where the symbol display of "6" is displayed, as in FIG. 41(b).

In addition, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round display "5" is displayed as the round advances by one from FIG. 41(b). That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 41(c), the round display of "5" suggests that the jackpot game of the fifth round is being performed.

Furthermore, in the number-of-balls display area of the main display area Dm, the display of the number of total number of prize balls "0652 shots" is displayed. At this time, as the “even-odd suggestion” of the “set suggestion effect” at the probability setting value “6”, the font of “6” indicating the even number of the hundredth place in the display of the total number of winning balls of “0652 shots” is the same. A font of "2" indicating the digit is displayed in a special typeface font.

The breakdown of the 652 prize balls in FIG. 41(c) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the first round to the fourth round: 10×15 prize balls×4 rounds=600 shots, 5 rounds 2 prizes to the special prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 30 shots, 2 prizes to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 20 shots, 2 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 2, total 652 shots.

In the state shown in FIG. 41(c), in the display of the total number of winning balls "0652 shots" in the 5th round, the portion "6" in the hundreds place and the part "2" in the ones place are in a special typeface font. displayed, and other numbers are displayed in normal font. For this reason, a player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, first, if the "setting suggestion effect" is "1 negative suggestion", the total number of winning balls displayed as "0652 shots" will be displayed as "2 , i.e., ``2'', ``5'', and ``6'' must all be special typeface fonts. Since "5" is a general font, it is understood that it is not "1 negative suggestion".

Next, if it is "even-odd suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", both even numbers of "6" and "2" in the total number of winning balls display of "0652 shots" must be special typeface fonts. In FIG. 41(c), since both "6" and "2" are displayed in a special typeface font, it is grasped that the even number display of "even-odd indication" applies provisionally.

Next, in the case of the ``456 suggestion'' effect of the ``setting suggestion effect'', both the numbers ``6'' and ``5'' in the display of the total number of winning balls of ``0652 shots'' must be in a special typeface font. However, in FIG. 41(c), only "6" is a special typeface font, "5" is not a special typeface font, and "2" is a special typeface font. grasp.

Next, if it is "immediate value suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one number is displayed in a special typeface font, and in FIG. Understand that it is not a "direct value suggestion" because it is not displayed in a special typeface font.

Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 41(c), only the even number display of "even-odd suggestion" is applied as the "setting suggestion effect", so that the player can see that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is an even number by the "even-odd suggestion". can grasp something.

In addition, the display of the total number of winning balls in the fifth round in FIG. 41(c) is as follows: If there are no prizes to the big prize opening 65a, "0622 shots", if there is one prize to the big prize openings 65a, "0637 shots", and if there are two prizes to the big prize openings 65a, " "0652 shots", "0667 shots" when three prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a, "0682 shots" when four prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a, and five prizes in the big prize opening 65a In the case of "0697 shots", "0712 shots" when 6 prizes are won to the big prize mouth 65a, "0727 shots" when 7 prizes are won to the big prize mouth 65a, "0727 shots" to the big prize mouth 65a "0742 shots" are displayed when there are 8 prizes, "0757 shots" are displayed when 9 prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a, and "0772 shots" are displayed when 10 prizes are won in the big prize opening 65a. be. Therefore, in the "even-odd suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect" in the 5th round, the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 65a is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. , 8 and 10 (that is, except for the case of 9), special typeface fonts "2", "4" and "6", which are the "even-odd indication", appear.

Next, FIG. 41(d) shows a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the situation of FIG. 41(c) and the sixth round jackpot game is being executed. Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a girl character pattern different from the character patterns of FIGS. A production such as is executed. It should be noted that, in the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm, the symbol display of "6" is displayed as in FIGS. 41(b) and 41(c).

In addition, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round display of "6" is displayed as the round advances by one from FIG. 41(c). That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 41(d), the round display of "6" suggests that the jackpot game of the 6th round is being performed.

Furthermore, in the number-of-balls display area of the main display area Dm, the total number of balls awarded is displayed as "0764 shots". In addition, in FIG. 41(d), since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the total number of prize balls displayed in the number of prize balls display area is expressed in a normal font.

The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 41(d) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the first round to the fifth round: 10×15 prize balls×5 rounds=750 shots, 6 rounds 0 prizes to the main prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 0 shots, 1 prize to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 4, total 764 shots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the case where the "set suggestion effect" of "456 suggestion" is executed at the timing of "round match" when the probability set value is set to "6" will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a case where "round matching" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", and FIG. FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing the derived state, and FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is started from the state of FIG. 42(a) and the fifth round is being performed; (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot game progresses from the state of (c) and the 7th round is performed.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the left display area Dm1, the middle display area Dm2, and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "6" is displayed in a stopped state. . That is, it indicates that a big hit by the "6" symbol is derived in the variable effect.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is happy that the big win result has been derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. A line display is displayed in which the pattern is praising the player, saying "You did it!". A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 42(b), the jackpot game is started from the situation of FIG. 42(a), the jackpot game progresses, and the entire main display region Dm is enlarged, and the sub display region Ds etc. disappears. It is In the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, any one of a plurality of character designs that expresses the fact that a big win has occurred by a variable effect or the like appears in each round. is appearing, and an effect is executed as if the uncle character is pleased with the fact that the big win has occurred.

Also, in the jackpot symbol display area, a state in which "6" symbols are displayed is shown. Furthermore, in the round number display area, the number "5" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot game of the 5th round is being performed.

In addition, a display of the total number of prize balls capable of displaying a 4-digit number "0643 shots" is displayed in the number of prize balls display area. The breakdown of the 643 prize balls in FIG. 42(b) is, for example, 10 prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the 1st round to the 4th round x 15 prize balls x 4 rounds = 600 shots, 5 rounds. 2 prizes to the main prize-winning port 65a x 15 prize balls = 30 shots, 1 prize-winning to the general prize-winning port 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 3 prizes to the second starting port 64b × 1 award ball = 3, total 643 shots.

In addition, in FIG. 42(b), since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the total number of prize balls displayed in the number of prize balls display area is expressed in a normal font.

Next, FIG. 42(c) shows a state in which the jackpot game progresses from the situation of FIG. 42(b) and the sixth round jackpot game is being executed. Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a girl character pattern different from the character pattern of FIG. be done. It should be noted that, in the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm, the symbol display of "6" is displayed as in FIG. 42(b).

In addition, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round display of "6" is displayed as the round advances by one from FIG. 42(b). That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 42(c), the round display of "6" suggests that the jackpot game of the 6th round is being performed.

Furthermore, in the number-of-balls display area of the main display area Dm, the total number of balls awarded is displayed as "0764 shots". At this time, as "456 suggestion" of "set suggestion effect" at the probability setting value "6", the number matching "4", "5" or "6" in the display of the total number of winning balls of "0764 shots" A font of "6" indicating the tens digit and a font of "4" indicating the ones digit are displayed in a special typeface font.

The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 42(c) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the 1st round to the 5th round: 10×15 prize balls×5 rounds=750 shots, 6 rounds 0 prizes to the main prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 0 shots, 1 prize to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 4, total 764 shots.

In the state shown in FIG. 42(c), in the total number of winning balls displayed as "0764 shots" in the sixth round, the tens digit "6" and the ones digit "4" are in a special typeface font. displayed, and the other digits are displayed in normal font. For this reason, a player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, first, if it is "1 negative suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", "2 , that is, both "6" and "4" must be special typeface fonts. Grasp that "negative suggestion" applies provisionally.

Next, if it is "even-odd suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", both even numbers of "6" and "4" in the total number of winning balls display of "0764 shots" must be special typeface fonts. , and in FIG. 42(c), since "6" and "4" are special typeface fonts, it is grasped that "even and odd suggestion" is provisionally applicable.

Next, in the case of the ``456 suggestion'' effect of the ``setting suggestion effect'', both the numbers ``6'' and ``4'' in the display of the total number of winning balls of ``0764 shots'' must be in a special typeface font. However, since "6" and "4" are special typeface fonts in FIG.

Next, if it is "direct value suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one number must be a special typeface font, but in FIG. Know that it's not a "suggestion" because the numbers are never displayed in a special typeface font. Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 42(c), a plurality of suggestions of "1 negative suggestion", "even-odd suggestion" and "456 suggestions" are applied as "setting suggestion effect", so the player can only use this display mode. Then, it is difficult to guess the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value cannot be grasped clearly.

Next, FIG. 42(d) shows a state in which four balls have won in the big winning opening 65a during the same 6th round jackpot game from the situation of FIG. 42(c). Here, the same girl character design as the character design of FIG. 42(c) continues to be displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It should be noted that, in the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm, the symbol display of "6" is displayed as in FIG. 42(c).

Here, in the display area for the number of prize balls in the main display area Dm, the display of the total number of prize balls "0824 shots" is displayed. At this time, as "456 suggestion" of the "set suggestion effect" at the probability setting value "6", the numbers matching "4", "5" or "6" among the display of the total number of winning balls of "0824 shots" Only the font of "4" indicating the ones place is displayed in the special typeface font.

The breakdown of the 824 prize balls in FIG. 42(d) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the 1st round to the 5th round: 10×15 prize balls×5 rounds=750 shots, 6 rounds 4 prizes to the main prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 60 shots, 1 prize to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 4, total 824 shots.

In the state shown in FIG. 42(d), in the display of the total number of winning balls "0824 shots" in the 6th round, the first digit "4" is displayed in a special typeface font, and the numbers in the other digits are displayed in a general font. is displayed in For this reason, a player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, first, if it is "1 negative suggestion" of "set suggestion effect", "2 , that is, both "2" and "4" must be displayed in the special font. ), it is not “1 negative suggestion”.

Next, if it is "even-odd suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", both even numbers of "2" and "4" in the total number of winning balls display of "0824 shots" must be special typeface fonts. 42(d), only "4" is a special typeface font, so unlike the situation in FIG. 42(c), it is understood that it is not "even-odd suggestion".

Next, in the case of the "456 suggestion" effect of the "setting suggestion effect", the numbers matching the numbers "4", "5" and "6" are special among the display of the total number of winning balls of "0824 shots". Since it is displayed in a typeface font, the ones digit "4" is a special typeface font, so in FIG. 42(d), as in FIG. Figure out.

Next, if it is "immediate value suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one number must be a special font font, but only the number "4" in FIG. Since it is displayed, it is understood that the "immediate price suggestion" at the probability setting value "4" applies to the provisional proposal. However, in FIG. 42(c), considering that a plurality of numbers are displayed in a special typeface font, it is already understood that "immediate value suggestion" does not apply, so it is not "immediate value suggestion". Grasp.

Therefore, by confirming the plurality of display modes in FIGS. 42(c) and 42(d), only "456 suggestion" is applicable as the "setting suggestion effect", so the player can see that the "setting suggestion effect" is performed. By checking the content of the display of the total number of winning balls that changes each time a ball enters the big winning hole 65a or the like in one round, the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "4" or more '4', '5' or '6').

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 having a so-called limit function, the situation when winning a jackpot type that is disadvantageous (low advantage) for the player is limited. The closer to the number of times, the easier it is to win the "setting suggestion effect". Therefore, even if a disadvantageous jackpot type is won and the remaining limit number of jackpots is reduced, the closer the number of jackpots at the time of winning is closer to the limit number of times, the more the player is suggested to set the probability setting value. Execution is facilitated, the advantage of easily knowing the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is imparted, and disappointment caused by winning a disadvantageous jackpot type can be alleviated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a situation where the pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, by winning the jackpot again, it becomes easier to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion performance". It is configured. By constructing in this way, in addition to the game value of winning the jackpot during the pullback period, the advantage of facilitating recognition of the content of the probability set value is provided, and how to win the jackpot during the pullback period is given. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating amusement. Also, for example, if the player predicts that the number of jackpots will be different from the limit number of times in a situation where the "setting suggestion effect" has not yet been executed after winning the pullback jackpot (for example, the remaining limit 5 times to 3 times), a right-handed game is performed, a lottery game is performed with the second special symbol, and a jackpot type advantageous to the player is won (continuously), and a large amount of direct game value is obtained. It becomes possible to aim at acquisition of a prize ball. On the other hand, when the player predicts that the number of times is close to the limit, the player performs a left-handed game and performs a lottery game with the first special symbol, daringly wins a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and plays an indirect game. It becomes possible to aim at the execution of the "setting suggestion production" which is the value. As a result, a variety of game characteristics are created by combining the number of hits and the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" with the game characteristics of hitting different ball shooting modes based on the number of times of big wins and the number of times of withdrawal. It is possible to improve the interest of

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won again in a situation where the jackpot is won during the pullback period, the content of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to facilitate more specific suggestion. That is, the player is made to win the jackpot of pullback, wins the jackpot in that state, and wins the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player in particular, so that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily recognized. By constructing in this way, in addition to the game value of winning the jackpot during the pullback period, the advantage of facilitating recognition of the content of the probability set value is provided, and how to win the jackpot during the pullback period is given. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating amusement. Also, for example, if the player predicts that the number of jackpots will be different from the limit number of times in a situation where the "setting suggestion effect" has not yet been executed after winning the pullback jackpot (for example, the remaining limit 5 times to 3 times), a right-handed game is performed, a lottery game is performed with the second special symbol, and a jackpot type advantageous to the player is won (continuously), and a large amount of direct game value is obtained. It becomes possible to aim at acquisition of a prize ball. On the other hand, when the player predicts that the number of times is close to the limit, the player performs a left-handed game and performs a lottery game with the first special symbol, daringly wins a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and plays an indirect game. It becomes possible to aim at the execution of the "setting suggestion production" which is the value. As a result, a variety of game characteristics are created by combining the number of hits and the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" with the game characteristics of hitting different ball shooting modes based on the number of times of big wins and the number of times of withdrawal. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the closer the situation when winning a big win at a disadvantage is closer to the limit number of times, the more easily the "setting suggesting effect" is executed. In other words, when the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, there is a high possibility that the number of remaining limit times at the time of the big win is small or non-existent. Therefore, by changing the execution probability of the "setting suggestion effect" according to the limit number of times, when the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, the player can guess the limit number of times and whether the limit has been reached. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the higher the probability set value is, the more likely it is that "round match" will be selected as the notification timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect", and the lower the probability set value is, the more likely the "setting suggestion effect" will be selected. is configured so that "ending" is likely to be selected as the notification timing for executing In this way, the timing at which the set value can be notified is changed according to the probability set value. By constructing the game so that the ``setting suggestion effect'' is easily executed during the game, it is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess the probability setting value according to the execution timing of the ``setting suggestion effect'' and to improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the round selected as the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the notification timing is changed, and any jackpot is executed during the ending effect. It is configured to execute the "setting suggestion effect" at the notification timing. In this way, by executing the change processing of the notification timing, when the execution lottery of "setting suggestion effect" is won, even if there is no round corresponding to the notification timing initially won, all jackpot types It is possible to reliably execute the "setting suggestion effect" in the ending effect that can be executed in. Therefore, even if the game specifications are changed at the time of model development, without changing the image development or software development at the time of model development, "in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability setting value" ”, and even if the corresponding round does not exist, by executing the “setting suggestion effect” in the ending effect, the winning “setting suggestion effect” is surely executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the pull-back jackpot is won during the pull-back period, when the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is won, the greater the number of pull-backs, the more "setting suggestion The suggestive content in the "effect" is configured so that the player can easily guess the probability set value. Therefore, as the number of pullbacks increases, the player can easily recognize the setting contents of the probability setting value, and the advantage of knowing the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be given. As a result, it is possible to provide a direct game value in the form of a big win during the pullback period and an indirect game value in the form of a suggestion of a set probability value, thereby increasing the interest of the game during the pullback period. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the more the pullback jackpot is won during the pullback period, the more the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is related to the probability setting value itself (that is, the timing of the "round match"). ) is configured to be easily executed. That is, since it is possible to estimate the set probability value based on the number of pullbacks and the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", the player can understand the execution timing of the pullback number and the "setting suggestion effect". It is possible to create a game property that makes the probability set value to be guessed, and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to clear the pullback counter 223h to "0" and initialize the number of pullbacks when the "time shortening state" ends. By configuring in this way, how to pull back the jackpot in a state where the pullback counter 223h is not initialized (that is, during the pullback period), and while giving the game value due to the jackpot, the execution probability of the "setting suggesting effect". Also, it is possible to create amusement that enhances the accuracy of the game, and improve the interest of the game during the pullback period.

In addition, by configuring the "setting suggestion effect" to be executable in any of a plurality of rounds (that is, round 1 to round 6) corresponding to the numbers used in the probability setting value in the jackpot game, in any round It is possible to make the player play while guessing whether or not the "setting suggesting effect" will be performed. It is possible to increase the interest in the game by creating a game feature of guessing whether or not it is a thing and guessing the probability setting value from the content.

Furthermore, in the rounds in which the "setting suggestion effect" can be performed, the total number of prize balls that easily reflects the contents of the "setting suggestion effect" can be easily grasped. can. Specifically, by displaying the total number of winning balls including one of "1" to "6" used as the probability setting value, the content of "setting suggestion effect" is accurately displayed in the total winning ball display. can be reflected in Therefore, the player is given the opportunity to determine how to display the total number of balls to be awarded so that the content of the "setting suggestion effect" can be accurately reflected. , the general prize winning port 63, the first starting port 64a and/or the second starting port 64b, the game can be played while the balls are winning, and the contents of the ``set suggestion performance'' are likely to be accurately reflected. The amusement of the game can be enhanced by the playability of whether or not the number display of "1" to "6" is included in the display.

Also, during each round game, when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 65a reaches the maximum number of winnings (that is, 10), the jackpot game of each round ends. When the special typeface font appears as , the display of the special typeface font as 'setting suggestion effect' is maintained for a while (for example, 3 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably execute the "setting suggesting effect" in the round in which the "setting suggesting effect" has been won.

In addition, when the content of the display of the total number of balls for which the "setting suggestion effect" is executed is updated as needed in the round in which the "setting suggestion effect" is performed, and the contents of the "setting suggestion effect" are applied to the updated number Then, every time the number appears, a special typeface font, which is a "setting suggestion effect", is displayed so that the probability setting value can be suggested. By configuring in this way, in one round in which the "setting suggestion effect" can be performed, the special typeface font appears at the timing when the ball is won in the big winning opening 65a, the general winning opening 63, etc. and the winning ball is generated. It is possible to have the player play while confirming whether or not to put out the ball, and not only to give a prize ball (game value) for one win, but also to suggest a probability set value based on one win. can be given. Therefore, it is possible to create a game at each timing when one winning occurs, and improve the interest of the game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot type is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, it is made easier to win the execution lottery of the ``setting suggestion performance''. had configured. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when winning a small win with a smaller game value than the big wins (both advantageous to the player and disadvantageous to the player), the "setting It is configured so that it is easy to win the "suggestion performance".

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the second embodiment have a low probability of special symbols in which the game state is "normal game state" or "time reduction state" for each set value. For the low probability state used in the case of the state (period that is not "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state"), and the high probability that the game state will be a jackpot from the low probability state of the special design It is divided into two types, one for high-probability state used in the case of "probability change state" or "latent probability change state", which is a probability state.

For each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

On the other hand, although the small winning probability in each special symbol is different, each set value for each special symbol and the number of small winning random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state are the same. is set to By making the number of small winning random numbers the same for each set value and for the low probability state and the high probability state in this way, the game value considering only the small winning game in all the set values and the game state The grant ratio of will be the same.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the increment of the jackpot random number in the high probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reduced to the low probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol While compensating for the number of false random numbers in the low-probability state, it is configured to be within the range of the number of false random numbers in the low-probability state. Also, the number of small hit random numbers is configured not to change between the low probability state and the high probability state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increment of the jackpot random number value, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of man-hours when designing the game specifications. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the second embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the jackpot random number that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 The value of the counter C1 (jackpot random number) is 50, and the value "0 to 49" is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "1" is set to be 50/10000=0.5/100 (ie, 0.5%). there is

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that will be a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 500, and the value "0 to 499" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the setting value "1" is 500/10000=5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is set so that it is easy to win 10 times from the probability state.

In addition, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that are small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 are both 100, low The value "50 to 149" in the case of the probability state or the value "500 to 599" in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 9850 pieces, the value "150 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9400 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers, and the value "600 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the probability of losing the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is set to 9850/10000=98.5/100 (that is, 98.5%), The probability of losing the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%).

In addition, for all set values (that is, "1" to "6"), the increase in the first special symbol jackpot random number in the special symbol high probability state is the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" , and the number of increased jackpot random number values is configured to be within the range of the number of losing random number values in the "normal game state".

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 52, and the value "0 to 51 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "2" is set to be 52/10000=0.52/100 (that is, 0.52%). there is

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that will be a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 520, and the value "0 to 519" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "2" is 520/10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%), and the high probability of the special symbol The state is set to make it easier to hit the jackpot ten times from the low-probability state.

Also, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is set to "1". As in the case, both are 100, the value "52 to 151" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "520 to 619" in the case of a high probability state are specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 It is That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 9848 pieces, the value "152 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9380 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers, and the value "620 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the probability of losing the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is set to 9848/10000=98.48/100 (that is, 98.48%), The probability of losing the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to 9380/10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 1%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.5%→0.52%, high probability state: 5%→5.2%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 54, and the value "0 to 53 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "3" is set to be 54/10000=0.54/100 (that is, 0.54%). there is

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 540, and the value "0 to 539" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "3" is 540/10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the high probability of the special symbol The state is set to make it easier to hit the jackpot ten times from the low-probability state.

In addition, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 are the set value "1" and As in the case of the setting value "2", both are 100, the value "54 to 153" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "540 to 639" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 9846 pieces, the value "154 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9360 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers, and the value "640 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the probability of losing the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "3" is set to 9846/10000=98.46/100 (that is, 98.46%), The probability of losing the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to 9360/10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 1%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.52%→0.54%, High probability state: 5.2%→5.4%).

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 56, and the value "0 to 55 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "4" is set to be 56/10000=0.56/100 (that is, 0.56%). there is

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 560, and the value "0 to 559" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "4" is 560/10000=5.6/100 (that is, 5.6%), and the high probability of the special symbol The state is set to make it easier to hit the jackpot ten times from the low-probability state.

Also, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" ~ As in the case of "3", both are 100, and the value "56 to 155" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "560 to 659" in the case of a high probability state is in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "4" is 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same in the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 9844 pieces, the value "156 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers, and the value "660 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the probability of losing the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the setting value "4" is set to 9844/10000=98.44/100 (that is, 98.44%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to 9340/10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

Therefore, the set value "4" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "3" (both 1%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.54%→0.56%, High probability state: 5.4%→5.6%).

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 58, and the value "0 to 57 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "5" is set to be 58/10000=0.58/100 (that is, 0.58%). there is

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (jackpot random number) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 580, and the value "0 to 579" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "5" is 580/10000=5.8/100 (that is, 5.8%), and the high probability of the special symbol The state is set to make it easier to hit the jackpot ten times from the low-probability state.

Also, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" ~ As in the case of "4", both are 100, and the value "58 to 157" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "580 to 679" in the case of a high probability state is in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 are the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 9842 pieces, the value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9320 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers, and the value "680 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the probability of losing the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is set to 9842/10000=98.42/100 (that is, 98.42%), The probability of losing the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to 9320/10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

Therefore, the set value "5" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "4" (both 1%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.56%→0.58%, high probability state: 5.6%→5.8%).

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 60, and the value "0 to 59 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value "6" is set to be 60/10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%). there is

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 600, and the value "0 to 599" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "6" is 600/10000=6/100 (that is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is set so that it is easy to win 10 times from the probability state.

Also, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" ~ As in the case of "5", both are 100, and the value "60 to 159" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "600 to 699" in the case of a high probability state is in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "6" is 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 9840 pieces, the value "160 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "700 to 9999" It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the probability of losing the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "6" is set to 9840/10000=98.4/100 (that is, 98.4%), The probability of losing the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to 9300/10000=93/100 (that is, 93%).

Therefore, the set value "6" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "5" (both 1%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.58%→0.6%, High probability state: 5.8%→6%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 43(b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the second embodiment, when the set value is "1", it is a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) is 50 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 49" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "1" is 50/10000=0.5/100 (that is, 0.5%) like the first special symbol. is set to be

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 500, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 499" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "1" is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%) as in the first special symbol, the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) to be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 are both 9400, The value "50 to 9449" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "500 to 9899" in the case of a high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same in the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 550 pieces, the value "9450 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 100 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value "9900 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "1" is set to be 550/10000=5.5/100 (that is, 5.5%), The probability of losing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to 100/10000=1/100 (that is, 1%).

In addition, in all set values (that is, "1" to "6"), the increase in the second special symbol jackpot random number in the high probability state of the special symbol is the same as the first special symbol, "normal game state , and the number of increased jackpot random numbers is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state''.

In this way, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and even compared to the random number of the second special symbol. The number is set to be extremely easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, it is set to make it easier to win a small win than a big win or a loss.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 52 pieces, and the value "0 to 51" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "2" is 52/10000=0.52/100 (that is, 0.52%), like the first special symbol. is set to be

In addition, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 520 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 519" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "2" is 520/10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%) like the first special symbol. Then, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is easy to hit 10 times from the low probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" As in the case of , both are 9400, the value "52 to 9451" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "520 to 9919" in the case of a high probability state are defined in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 (set ). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 548 pieces, the value "9452 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 80 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value "9920 to 9999" 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "2" is set to be 548/10000=5.48/100 (that is, 5.48%), The probability of losing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to 80/10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 94%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.5%→0.52%, High probability state: 5%→5.2%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 54, and the value "0 to 53" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 54/10000=0.54/100 (that is, 0.54%), like the first special symbol. is set to be

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 540, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 539" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "3" is 540/10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%) like the first special symbol. Then, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is easy to hit 10 times from the low probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" And as in the case of "2", both are 9400, the value "54 to 9453" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "540 to 9939" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 546 pieces, the value "9454 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 60 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value "9940 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "3" is set to be 546/10000=5.46/100 (that is, 5.46%), The probability of losing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to 60/10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 94%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.52%→0.54%, High probability state: 5.2%→5.4%).

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 56, and the value "0 to 55" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "4" is 56/10000=0.56/100 (that is, 0.56%), like the first special symbol. is set to be

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 560, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 559" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "4" is 560/10000=5.6/100 (that is, 5.6%) like the first special symbol. Then, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to make it easier to hit 10 times from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" Like the case of "3", both are 9400, the value "56 to 9455" in the case of the low probability state, or the value "560 to 9959" in the case of the high probability state, the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "4" is 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 544 pieces, the value "9456 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value "9960 to 9999" 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "4" is set to be 544/10000=5.44/100 (that is, 5.44%), The probability of losing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to 40/10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

Therefore, the set value "4" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "3" (both 94%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.54%→0.56%, High probability state: 5.4%→5.6%).

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 58, and the value "0 to 57" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "5" is 58/10000=0.58/100 (that is, 0.58%) like the first special symbol. is set to be

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 580, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 579" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "5" is 580/10000=5.8/100 (that is, 5.8%) like the first special symbol. Then, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is easy to hit 10 times from the low probability state.

Here, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that become small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" Like the case of "4", both are 9400, the value "58 to 9457" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "580 to 9979" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 542 pieces, the value "9458 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 20 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value "9980 to 9999" 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "5" is set to be 542/10000=5.42/100 (that is, 5.42%), The probability of losing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to 20/10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

Therefore, the set value "5" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "4" (both 94%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.56%→0.58%, high probability state: 5.6%→5.8%).

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 60 pieces, and the value "0 to 59" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the setting value "6" is 60/10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%), like the first special symbol. is set to be

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that will be a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 600, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 599" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%) as in the first special symbol, the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so that the jackpot is 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that become small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" Like the case of "5", both are 9400, and the value "60 to 9459" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "600 to 9999" in the case of a high probability state is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "6" is 9400/10000=94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability state and high probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same between the states.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 540 pieces, the value "9460 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is 0 remaining other than the jackpot random number and the small hit random number, and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is set to the losing random number. No corresponding value is stored. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "6" is set to be 540/10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), The probability of losing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to 0/10000=0/100 (that is, 0%), and is configured so that the losing combination does not appear. .

Therefore, the set value "6" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "5" (both 94%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low Probability state: 0.58%→0.6%, High probability state: 5.8%→6%).

In this way, in both the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is compensated from the number of losing random numbers in the low probability state. However, it is configured so as to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the low-probability state. Also, the number of small hit random numbers is configured not to change between the low probability state and the high probability state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increment of the jackpot random number value, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of man-hours when designing the game specifications. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation machine). A dedicated small prize-winning slot (not shown) that is opened when a win is won is arranged on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front and on the downstream side of the normal electric combination 64c (on the lower side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front). It is configured to be able to execute the following game properties using the jackpot random number table 202a. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state", a left-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed, and the jackpot game is won in the dynamic display of the special figure 1. While obtaining the game value from the jackpot game, depending on the type of the jackpot, a ``probability fluctuation state'' in which the winning assistance function is not activated, a ``probability fluctuation state'' in which the winning assistance function is activated, or a ``probability variation state'' in which the winning assistance function is activated. To realize the playability of which "time shortening state" will be. In addition, in the "time shortening state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and when the right-handed game is performed, how to dynamically display the special figure 2 while the winning assist state is valid? To realize the game property of whether or not to win a jackpot game. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function is activated, a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification. To realize a game property as to whether or not it becomes a big win type. Then, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function is inactive, right-handed games are encouraged in advance as game specifications. Since the winning probability of the pattern is about 1/2, the normal electric combination 64c is opened), and the ball is entered into the second start opening 64b, and based on the winning, a small winning game is won to win a small winning opening. A ``probability variation state'' in which the prize assisting function is inactive without winning the jackpot game based on the prize winning to the second start port 64b. It is set as a game specification in advance so as to realize the game property that the period of is continued for a long time and the game value of the small winning game is obtained for a long time.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small win with a lower gaming value obtained from a big win is won, a lottery for execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is performed with a predetermined probability. It is constructed such that the more successive small wins are won, the easier it is to win the execution lottery of the 'setting suggesting performance'. Specifically, the number of times the small winning game is won continuously is counted, and when the count value is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value (for example, 50 times), the winning probability of the "setting suggestion effect" is increased. Configured to be higher than normal (for example, double). Then, when the count value reaches a second predetermined value (for example, 100 times) that is greater than the first predetermined value, the winning probability of the "set suggestion effect" is further increased (for example, 5 times). Configure. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 is given to the player by increasing the possibility of grasping the setting contents of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 as the small winning game is successively won. It is possible to make it easy to notify the determination element of whether or not to continue the game at . Therefore, even in the case where a small win that is more disadvantageous than the big win is won and the game value of the big win is not obtained, the pachinko machine 10 is made easy to suggest the setting contents of the probability setting value to the player. It is possible to provide an advantage that the probability setting value of is easy to know, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the prize assisting function is inactive, when the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" in which the prize assisting function is inactive again is won. Secondly, the content of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is more specifically suggested in the ``setting suggestion performance'' that can be executed when a small win is won in subsequent games. Specifically, for example, during the "probability fluctuation state" in which the prize winning auxiliary function is inactive, the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" in which the prize winning auxiliary function is inactive again is selected, and the "probability The contents of the ``setting suggesting presentation'' are configured to be more concrete by overlapping the number of winnings of small wins during the ``fluctuation state''. By configuring in this way, the execution probability of the "setting suggestion effect" based on the number of consecutive winnings of the big win type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning auxiliary function is inactive and the number of consecutive winnings of the small win And by changing the contents of the suggestion, it is possible to create a game property of how to generate a "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning auxiliary function is inactive, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured to select a relatively long variation pattern when winning a small win, which is different from when winning a big win or when a loss is extracted. Specifically, at the time of losing, at the time of selecting the variation pattern of the variation performance that derives the losing result, for example, one of the variation patterns with a variation time of "3 seconds" to "120 seconds" is selected, and a big hit Sometimes, at the time of selecting the variation pattern of the variation performance for deriving the jackpot result, for example, any variation pattern with a variation time of "25 seconds" to "130 seconds" is selected. On the other hand, at the time of the small win, when selecting the variation pattern of the variation performance that derives the result of the small win, a variation time of ``200 seconds'' to ``300 seconds'', which is a longer variation time than the variation time selected at the time of loss and at the time of the big win. Select one of the fluctuation patterns. Then, it is configured so that the "setting suggestive effect" can be executed only in the variation pattern that can be selected at the time of the small win. By constructing in this way, even if a small win that is more disadvantageous than the big win is won and the game value of the big win is not obtained, the variation pattern that can be selected only at the time of the small win is the ``setting suggestion performance''. is executed to make it easy for the player to suggest the setting contents of the probability setting value, and to give the advantage of making it easy to know the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. In this case, when performing the "setting suggestion production" in the fluctuation production based on the small hit, the timing (i.e., , ``120 seconds'' or after ``130 seconds''), the ``setting suggestion performance'' is performed at a timing that cannot be executed at the time of loss or a big hit, and the ``setting suggestion performance'' is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the performance.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small win with a lower gaming value than a big win is won, a lottery for execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is performed with a predetermined probability. In addition, the more successive small wins are won, the easier it is to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion performance". The second special pattern is more likely to win a small win than the first special pattern, and the first special pattern is more likely to be lost than the big win and the small win, and the second special pattern is more likely to be a small win than the big win and the loss. It is designed to be easily elected. By constructing in this way, the game is executed in the game state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") in which the second special symbols that are likely to be won continuously in small wins can be executed. Thus, it is possible to continuously win the small winning games, and the more the small winning games are successively won, the higher the possibility of grasping the setting contents of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to be notified of the factors for judging whether or not to continue the game on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, even in the case where a small win that is more disadvantageous than the big win is won and the game value of the big win is not obtained, the pachinko machine 10 is made easy to suggest the setting contents of the probability setting value to the player. It is possible to provide an advantage that the probability setting value of is easy to know, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can produce the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a jackpot game with a number of rounds (that is, 4 rounds) smaller than the number of stages (that is, 6 stages) of the probability setting value can occur. When the selected round is a jackpot that is not executed, the notification timing is changed, and the ``setting suggestion effect'' is executed at the notification timing during the ending effect that is executed for any jackpot. rice field. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the number of rounds for all jackpots is equal to or greater than the number of rounds of the set probability value, and there is no need to change the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect". configured as follows.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment. and description thereof is omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 44, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 of the third embodiment is divided into groups of whether the number of jackpots reaches the limit or when the limit is reached, and the gaming state in which the jackpot occurs. It is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other in the group.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, until the next jackpot, both the jackpot probability of special symbols and the hit probability of normal symbols are in a high probability state. After the "probability variation A" corresponding to the "fluctuation state" and the maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, the special symbol jackpot probability becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot, while the special symbol dynamic display is performed 100 times. Until then, "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability of hitting the normal pattern is high probability, and after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, the probability of the special pattern is a high probability state. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal pattern is low probability state "latency probability change A" corresponding to the "latency probability change state" and the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 6 rounds, the special pattern jackpot probability is in a low probability state However, until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times, the probability of winning the normal pattern is high. After the jackpot, there is a "passing A" in which both the jackpot probability of special symbols and the hit probability of normal symbols are in a low probability state.

The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected based on the presence or absence of reaching the limit and the gaming state at the time the jackpot occurs are different. On the other hand, values that can be taken by the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type are associated.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 44, before reaching the limit, and when the first special symbol jackpot occurs in the "normal game state", the jackpot for "probability variation A" The value "0 to 9" of the type counter C2 is associated, the value "10 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation B", and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latency probability variation A". The value of "30 to 89" is associated, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "90 to 99" is associated with "time saving A". Also, before the limit is reached, and if the first special pattern jackpot occurs in the "latency probability fluctuation state" (similar to "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state"), to "probability variation A" In contrast, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 9" is associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "10 to 19" is associated with "probability variation B", and the jackpot is associated with "latency probability variation A". The value "20 to 89" of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value "90 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A".

That is, in the winning lottery of the first special symbols in the "normal game state" before the limit is reached, the big hit random number counter stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the value of C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table. 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "25", the jackpot type is " If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "43", the "latent probability variable A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", it is set as the jackpot type. "Time reduction A" is determined.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" before the limit is reached, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is the special figure 1 jackpot type. Determined from the table 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "12", as the jackpot type If "probability variation B" is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "25", "latent probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "Time saving A" is determined as.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before the limit is reached, the jackpot type of "variable probability A" is 10%, and the jackpot type of "variable probability B" is 20%. , The jackpot type of “latency probability change A” will be 60%, and the jackpot type of “time reduction A” will be elected at a rate of 10%. Also, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of "variable A" is 10%, and the jackpot type of "variable B" is 10%, 70% of the jackpot type of “latency probability change A”, and 10% of the jackpot type of “time reduction A” will be elected.

Next, in the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 44, when the first special symbol jackpot occurs when the limit is reached, any game including "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" Even in the state, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 89" is associated with "rush A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "90 to 99" corresponds to "time saving A". attached.

That is, in the lottery for the first special symbols in all gaming states when the limit is reached, the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area 203d. When the value of is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "rush A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type is " Time reduction A" is determined.

Therefore, in all game states, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the limit is reached, the jackpot type of "Push through A" is 90%, the jackpot type of "Time reduction A" is 10%, will be elected at a ratio of

In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol in the third embodiment is different from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol in the first embodiment, and the number of rounds is 6R or more. Since the other contents (game specifications) are the same, description thereof is omitted.

In this way, the number of rounds in all jackpot types is set to be at least the number of stages of the set probability value or more, so "execute the ``setting suggestion effect'' with the number of rounds corresponding to the set probability value." It is possible to realize the playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the jackpot effect processing (S1105) of the third embodiment. In the jackpot effect processing (S1105) of the third embodiment, the number of rounds for each jackpot type is always equal to or greater than the number of stages of the set probability value, and the "set suggestion effect" is executed at the initially set execution timing of the "set suggestion effect". Therefore, the process of determining whether or not the "setting suggestion effect" is not being executed at the ending (see S1307 in FIG. 38) becomes unnecessary.

In the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the third embodiment, in the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the "ending" is set as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" (S1306). If "ending" is not set as the execution timing (S1306: No), the "setting suggestion effect" has already been executed, or the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" has not been won in the first place, so the process of S1303 is performed. is not performed, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the case of adopting the game property of "executing the "setting suggestion effect" in the number of rounds corresponding to the probability setting value", all jackpots By configuring the number of rounds for each type to be equal to or greater than the number of stages of the set probability value, it is possible to reliably execute the "setting suggestion effect" at the initially set notification timing. As a result, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" from being biased toward the ending due to the absence of the initially set number of rounds. In addition, the process of determining whether or not the "setting suggestion effect" has been executed is not required in the ending of the big win, and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can produce the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so as to prevent the player from suggesting the remaining limit number of times until ``at the time of reaching the limit'' in which ``probability fluctuation state'' is not given when winning a jackpot. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the target round for executing the "setting suggesting effect", the "setting suggesting effect" is executed during the round game, and whether or not the remaining limit number of times is suggested. is determined, and according to the determination result, a ``remaining limit number suggesting effect'' for suggesting (notifying) the player the remaining limit number of times at the start of the round is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first to third embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 46, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the jackpot effect processing (S1105) of the fourth embodiment. In the jackpot effect processing (S1105) of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the round in which the "setting suggestion effect" is executed matches the remaining limit number of times. The remaining limit number of times is suggested by displaying a "remaining limit number of times suggesting effect" for changing the "round start display" displayed at times from a normal display mode to a special mode. Then, after that, during the round game of the round, the font of the numbers displayed for the total number of prize balls is changed to execute the "setting suggesting effect".

In the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the fourth embodiment, in the process of S1302, when it is determined that the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" and the number of rounds of the jackpot match (S1302: Yes), The number of remaining jackpots until winning a jackpot type that does not cause a "probability fluctuation state" (that is, the period in which a jackpot type that causes a "probability fluctuation state" can be won and a state in which a jackpot can easily occur can be maintained) matches the number of rounds (S1351). This determination is made by determining the value of the sub-round counter 223m and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e. That is, when the value of the sub-round counter 223m is "6", it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is "0".

In the processing of S1351, when it is determined that the number of rounds and the remaining limit number of times match (S1351: Yes), it is determined that the execution timing of the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" has come, and the round game is started. In the "round start display" displayed at the time, the "remaining limit number of times "Suggestive Effect" (see FIG. 47(d)) is set for execution (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1353. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1351 that the number of rounds does not match the remaining limit number of times (S1351: No), the process of S1352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1353. In this case, the "round start display" is executed in the "normal display mode" without the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" (see FIGS. 47(b) and 47(f)).

In the process of S1353, it is determined that the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" has arrived, and the "setting suggestion effect" corresponding to the type (content) of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is displayed. Execution is set so as to be performed during the round game (S1353), the jackpot effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

In this way, when the ``set suggesting performance'' is performed, the ``remaining limit number of times suggesting performance'' is also performed when the number of rounds to be executed matches the remaining limit number of times. Then, when both the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" can be executed, the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" is first executed at the start of the round, and then the "setting suggesting effect" is executed during the round game. It is configured to execute "Direction". By constructing in this way, whether or not to continue the game in the pachinko machine 10 is executed together with the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number of times suggesting effect", which are elements for determining whether or not to continue the game. To improve the amusement of a game by providing the advantage of facilitating recognition of such judgment elements, and creating a game property of how to execute a ``set suggesting performance'' and a ``remaining limit number of times suggesting performance''. can be done.

Also, even if both the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" can be executed, the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit suggesting effect" suggesting the content to the player by changing the number display. Limit number of suggesting performances" are not displayed at the same time, and either one of the suggesting performances is executed in order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent in advance from overlooking any one of the suggestive effects due to the execution of duplicate suggestive effects, and it is not possible to recognize which number is which suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is prevented. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused about the contents of the.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, at the timing of the "round match" when the probability setting value is set to "6", the "set suggestion effect" of the "immediate price suggestion" and the "remaining limit A case where the "number of times suggestion effect" is executed will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a case where "round match" is selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 47(a) is the third symbol of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot result is derived in the variable performance on the display device 81, and FIG. 47(b) shows that the jackpot game is started from the state of FIG. 47(a) and the first round is started. FIG. 47(c) is a diagram showing a state in which "round start display" is displayed, and FIG. 47(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the first round is being performed from the state of FIG. 47(b); (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a "round start display" indicating that the jackpot game progresses from the state of FIG. 47(c) and the sixth round starts is displayed, and FIG. , is a diagram showing a state in which the sixth round is performed from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the "round start display" which shows that the 7th round starts from the state of e) was displayed.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), in the left display area Dm1, the middle display area Dm2, and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "6" is stopped and displayed. . That is, it indicates that a big hit by the "6" symbol is derived in the variable effect.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is happy that the big win result has been derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. A line display is displayed in which the pattern is praising the player, saying "You did it!". A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 47(b), a jackpot game is started from the situation in FIG. 47(a), and a "round start display" indicating the start of the first round is shown. In this "round start display", the sub-display area Ds and the like are erased as the entire main display area Dm is enlarged. Then, in the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, the black character display of katakana "round" and the black number display of the number "1" are combined, and the display object "round 1" is displayed on the screen. A “normal round start effect”, which is a effect (animation) that approaches the front of the screen from the depth direction, is executed. In the first embodiment, the “round start display” is performed for a predetermined period (eg, “2 seconds”) from the stage when the round is started, and then the round game production (eg, FIG. 47 (c), etc.) switch.

Next, FIG. 47(c) shows a state in which the first round game is started from the situation of FIG. 47(b). Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, one of a plurality of character designs appearing in a variable effect or the like appears for each corresponding round, and in FIG. An effect is executed as if the boy character is pleased with the fact that the big win has occurred.

Also, in the jackpot symbol display area, a state in which "6" symbols are displayed is shown. Furthermore, in the round number display area, the number "1" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot game of the first round is being performed.

In addition, a display of the total number of prize balls capable of displaying a 4-digit number "0045 shots" is displayed in the number of prize balls display area. The breakdown of the 45 prize balls in FIG. 47(c) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the special prize opening 65a in the first round×15 prize balls=45, and the number of prizes awarded to the general prize opening 63 is 0. x 10 prize balls = 0 shots, 0 winning prizes to the second starting port 64b x 1 prize ball = 0 shots, totaling 45 shots.

In addition, in FIG. 47(c), since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed, the total number of prize balls displayed in the number of prize balls display area is expressed in a normal font.

Next, in FIG. 47(d), the jackpot game progresses from the situation in FIG. 47(c), showing a state where the "round start display" indicating the start of the sixth round is appearing. Here, as the "setting suggestion effect", the content of "immediate price suggestion" is won at the timing of "round match", so the round game of the number of rounds equivalent to the probability setting value "6" In the middle, the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, and since the probability setting value and the number of rounds match, at the start of the round number of rounds equivalent to the probability setting value "6", the "remaining limit number of times suggestion effect ” will be executed.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 47(d), in the "round start display" executed at the start of the sixth round, the character display indicating "Round 6" is changed to "Normal round start effect". ”, the gold character display of the katakana character “round” and the gold number display of the number “6” are combined to create a still image of the display object “Round 6” on the screen, and the number A “remaining limit number suggesting effect” combined with an effect in which a glittering effect is added around “6” is executed. At this stage, the character display of the special typeface font, which is the "setting suggestive effect", has not appeared. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" in the "round start display". In addition, by executing the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" in the "round start display", it is possible to suggest that the "setting suggesting effect" will be performed during the upcoming round game. Therefore, the player who sees the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" in the "round start display" will pay attention to whether or not the special typeface font as the "setting suggesting effect" will appear in the round game to be performed from now on. Since the player can concentrate on the game, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, FIG. 47(e) shows a state in which the "round start display" of FIG. 47(d) is terminated, the screen content is switched, and the jackpot game of the 6th round is being executed. Here, a girl character pattern different from the character pattern of FIG. 47(c) appears in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed as if the girl character is happy that the big win has occurred. be done. It should be noted that, in the jackpot symbol display area of the main display area Dm, the symbol display of "6" is displayed as in FIG. 47(c).

In addition, a round display of "6" is displayed in the round number display area of the main display area Dm. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 47(e), the round display of "6" indicates that the jackpot game of the 6th round is being performed as indicated by the round number indicated by the "round start display". It suggests.

Furthermore, in the number-of-balls display area of the main display area Dm, the total number of balls awarded is displayed as "0764 shots". At this time, as the "immediate value suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect" at the probability setting value "6", only the font of "6" indicating the tens place in the display of the total number of winning balls of "0764 shots" is a special typeface font is displayed in

The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 47(e) is, for example, the number of prizes awarded to the big prize opening 65a from the 1st round to the 5th round: 10×15 prize balls×5 rounds=750 shots, 6 rounds 0 prizes to the main prize opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 0 shots, 1 prize to the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes to the second start opening 64b × 1 award ball = 4, total 764 shots.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(e), in the display of the total number of winning balls "0764 shots" in the sixth round, only the portion "6" in the tens place is displayed in a special typeface font, and the other numbers are displayed in a general font. is displayed. For this reason, a player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, first, if it is "1 negative suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", "2 , that is, both "6" and "4" must be special typeface fonts, but in FIG. 47(e), only "6" is a special typeface font. understand that there is no

Next, if it is "even-odd suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", both even numbers of "6" and "4" in the total number of winning balls display of "0764 shots" must be special typeface fonts. , in FIG. 47(e), only "6" is a special typeface font, so it is understood that it is not "even-odd suggestion".

Next, in the case of the ``456 suggestion'' effect of the ``setting suggestion effect'', both the numbers ``6'' and ``4'' in the display of the total number of winning balls of ``0764 shots'' must be in a special typeface font. However, in FIG. 47(e), only "6" is a special typeface font, so it is understood that it is not "456 suggestion".

Next, if it is "immediate value suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one of the total number of winning balls display of "0764 shots" is displayed in a special typeface font, as shown in FIG. 47(e). , only the number "6" is displayed in a special typeface font, so it can be grasped that the "immediate value suggestion" in the probability setting value "6" applies provisionally.

Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 47(e), only "immediate value suggestion" applies as "setting suggestion effect", so the player understands that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "6". be able to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game while guessing in which round the "setting suggesting effect" will be performed or not. In addition to estimating what kind of ``set suggesting effect'' is, the playability of estimating the probability setting value from the content can be created, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, even when both the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" can be executed, the "setting suggesting effect" that suggests the content to the player by changing the number display is not possible. The ``remaining limit number suggesting performance'' is not displayed at the same time, and one of the suggesting performances is executed in order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent in advance from overlooking any one of the suggestive effects due to the execution of duplicate suggestive effects, and it is not possible to recognize which number is which suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is prevented. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused about the contents of the.

Next, in FIG. 47(f), the state in which the "round start display" indicating that the 6th round game is over from the situation of FIG. 47(e) and the 7th round is started is appearing. showing. In this "round start display", a "normal round start effect", which is an effect (animation) in which the display object "Round 7" approaches the screen from the depth direction to the front side of the screen, is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the "setting suggestion effect" is performed, when the number of rounds to be executed and the remaining limit number of times match, the "remaining limit number of times Suggestive production" is also configured to be performed at the same time. Then, when both the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" can be executed, the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" is first executed at the start of the round, and then the "setting suggesting effect" is executed during the round game. It is configured to execute "Direction". By constructing in this way, whether or not to continue the game in the pachinko machine 10 is executed together with the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number of times suggesting effect", which are elements for determining whether or not to continue the game. To improve the amusement of a game by providing the advantage of facilitating recognition of such judgment elements, and creating a game property of how to execute a ``set suggesting performance'' and a ``remaining limit number of times suggesting performance''. can be done.

Also, even if both the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit number suggesting effect" can be executed, the "setting suggesting effect" and the "remaining limit suggesting effect" suggesting the content to the player by changing the number display. Limit number of suggesting performances" are not displayed at the same time, and either one of the suggesting performances is executed in order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent in advance from overlooking any one of the suggestive effects due to the execution of duplicate suggestive effects, and it is not possible to recognize which number is which suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is prevented. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused about the contents of the.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, when a player wins a disadvantageous win, it is easy to win the "setting suggestion effect" according to the remaining limit number of times without considering the continuity of the disadvantageous win. had configured. For example, after winning a disadvantageous win, if you win a jackpot that is not a disadvantageous win (that is, the jackpot type “probable variable A”, etc., hereinafter referred to as “advantageous win”), and then win a disadvantageous win again, the above Since the remaining limit number of jackpots is reduced based on 3 jackpots, even if a favorable win is won on the way and the unfavorable win is not continuous, when the unfavorable win is won again after the favorable win. It was configured to facilitate execution of the "setting suggestion effect".

On the other hand, it may be configured such that it is easy to win the "setting suggestion effect" on condition that the disadvantageous wins continue. Specifically, for example, as the number of remaining limit times decreases in a state where disadvantageous hits are continuous, it becomes easier to win the "setting suggestion effect". The winning probability of the "setting suggestion performance" is configured to be returned to the initial setting. By constructing in this way, even when the disadvantageous wins are consecutive, it creates the advantage that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is easy to know, and the disappointment that the number of remaining limit times becomes small and the disadvantageous wins are eliminated. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by continuous As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

Further, the content (type and notification timing) of the "setting suggestion effect" may be determined according to the accumulated number of disadvantage hits until reaching the limit number of times. Specifically, without considering the continuity of the disadvantageous hit, the greater the total number of occurrences of the disadvantageous hit until the limit number of times is reached (that is, until the jackpot occurs 6 times), the more the "setting suggestion effect , or an effect of concretely (directly) suggesting the probability setting value in the “setting suggesting effect” may be easily executed. With this configuration, even if an advantageous win occurs in the middle and the continuity of the disadvantageous win is interrupted, the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is simply set according to the number of occurrences of the disadvantageous event. It is possible to create the advantage of making it easier to know, and to alleviate the disappointment caused by a decrease in the remaining limit number of times and the disappointment caused by a series of unfavorable hits. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game. In this case, the accumulated number of disadvantageous wins may be cleared each time the limit number of times is reached, or the accumulated number of disadvantageous wins is not cleared each time the limit number of times is reached, and the accumulated disadvantageous wins accumulated since the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. may be configured to count the number of times, and the greater the counted number of times, the easier it is to execute the "setting suggestion effect."

<Modification 2>
In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the "setting suggestion effect" is executed during the round of the jackpot. On the other hand, timing other than during the round of the jackpot, that is, during the opening period of the jackpot, during the interval period, or during the execution of the variable effect (for example, during the predetermined "reach display", when a specific notice appears, etc.) ), during a demonstration effect (for example, during model interlocking effect by RTC, during gaming machine customization by player's button operation, etc.), the "setting suggesting effect" may be executed.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the player wins the game with a disadvantageous win, it is easy for the player to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect". On the other hand, a certain predetermined period is set in advance, and it is constructed so as to make it easier to win the execution lottery of the ``setting suggestion performance'' due to other events that occur within the predetermined period and are disadvantageous to the player. good too. Specifically, for example, after one jackpot, the jackpot has not been won even though the dynamic display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) or more, or the first start port 64a, etc. If the balls enter the general prize-winning opening 63 in succession without receiving a special symbol lottery without winning a prize, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10,000 shots) will be placed in the out-opening, to which no game value will be awarded. It may be constructed so as to make it easier to win the lottery for execution of the "set suggestion effect" when it flows in or the like.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the player wins the game with a disadvantageous win, it is easy for the player to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect". On the other hand, it may be configured such that it becomes easier for the player to win the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" due to an event that is advantageous for the player that occurs within a predetermined period. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of jackpot "Renzo" occurs, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10,000 shots) are paid in total by the big hit "Renso" It may be constructed so as to make it easier to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggesting effect" when the lottery is issued, or when winning consecutively with advantageous wins. By constructing in this manner, the interest that an advantageous event has occurred is combined with the interest that the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped, so that the interest can be remarkably improved.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the player wins the game with a disadvantageous win, it is easy for the player to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect". On the other hand, it may be constructed so that the execution lottery for the "setting suggesting effect" can be won due to an event unrelated to the advantage or disadvantage. Specifically, for example, a lottery for execution of the "setting suggestion effect" may be performed each time a predetermined time is clocked by a real time clock (hereinafter abbreviated as "RTC"). Alternatively, when the game is continuously executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, balls are continuously shot), the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" may be performed.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to make it easier to win the "setting suggestion effect" that suggests the probability setting value by winning with a disadvantage. Instead of or in addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 with a limit function is configured to make it easier to win a ``remaining number of times suggesting performance'' suggesting the remaining number of times by winning with a disadvantageous win. may By constructing in this way, when the jackpot is won, the number of remaining jackpots reaching the limit number of times can be suggested to the player, and the element for judging whether or not to continue the game in the pachinko machine 10 is presented. By doing so, it is possible to create a game feature of whether or not to continue the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won, based on the probability setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the probability setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 on that day is suggested. was configured to run On the other hand, it is configured to execute a "change suggestion effect" that suggests that the probability setting value has been changed from the previous day's probability setting value, and a "previous day setting suggestion effect" that suggests the probability setting value of the previous day. You may By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the determination factors (estimation factors) of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10, create a game property of estimating the probability setting value, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the above-described first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the "setting suggestion effect". On the other hand, the "setting suggestion effect" may be configured to be executed in a notification mode that is difficult to discriminate (recognize) from players other than the player who is playing the game. Specifically, an LED or the like that can be visually recognized only from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and the probability setting value is displayed on the LED, or if the third symbol display device 81 is not always visually recognized, it is difficult to recognize. (For example, production with a subliminal effect, etc.) may be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who is not playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a person recognizes that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

<Modification 9>
In the above-described first embodiment, the suggestion content lottery table 222f and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i are configured to simultaneously draw lots for the type of "set suggestion effect" and the notification timing. On the other hand, the type of "setting suggestion effect" and the notification timing may be drawn separately. Specifically, for example, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not a "setting suggesting effect" is to be executed, and a lottery is drawn for notification timing separately from the lottery. You may comprise so that the kind of may be selected by lottery.

<Modification 10>
In the above-described first embodiment, the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is first determined, and then it is determined whether or not the corresponding number of rounds exists. (i.e., run at the ending). On the other hand, it is also possible to comprehend the number of rounds of the jackpot before drawing lots for the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" and draw lots for the notification timing to be executed from the notification timings including the number of rounds. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the deviation of the notification timing toward a predetermined time (that is, the ending time) due to the change based on the absence of the relevant round, and to execute a well-balanced effect. .

<Modification 11>
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the occurrence of a jackpot when the prize-winning assisting function is operating when the limit is reached, it is determined that the jackpot is a pull-back jackpot during a so-called pull-back period, and based on subsequent jackpot winnings. It is configured so that it is easy to win the lottery for execution of the "setting suggestion performance". That is, regardless of whether the limit is reached based on the jackpot of the first special symbol or the limit is reached based on the jackpot of the second special symbol, if the winning assist function is operating, it is determined to be a pullback jackpot. was configured to On the other hand, when the limit is reached by the big win in the second special pattern and the big win is won in the ``time shortening state'' based on the big win, it is determined as a so-called pullback big win and based on the winning of the subsequent big win. It may be configured so that it is easy to win the execution lottery for the "set suggestion effect". That is, by making the conditions for achieving a so-called pullback jackpot more difficult, the sense of accomplishment of winning the pullback jackpot can be amplified, and the amusement of the game during the pullback period can be improved.

<Modification 12>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the limit is reached, the game is always won with a disadvantageous win, and based on the winning of the disadvantageous win, the execution lottery for the "setting suggesting effect" is performed. On the other hand, it may be constructed such that the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" is not performed in the case of a disadvantageous win at the time of reaching the limit. Since the disadvantageous hit at the time of reaching the limit always arrives, even when the disadvantageous hit at the time of reaching the limit is performed, when the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" is performed, the "setting suggestion effect" appears frequently. There is a risk that it will be lost. Therefore, by configuring so that the execution lottery for the ``setting suggestion effect'' is not performed in the case of a disadvantageous hit when the limit is reached, it is possible to receive the execution lottery for the ``setting suggestion effect'' only by the player's own pull. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by creating the game property of whether or not the execution lottery of the "setting suggesting performance" can be received.

<Modification 13>
In the above-described first embodiment, after winning the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "probability variation B", in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be executed by performing a right-handed game, if it is before the limit is reached, it is advantageous In addition to the jackpot type "probability variable A" that is a hit, it was configured to be able to win the jackpot type "time reduction A" that is a disadvantageous hit. On the other hand, in the dynamic display of the second special symbols that can be executed by playing the right-handed game, if the limit is not reached, only advantageous wins are won, and disadvantageous wins are not won. In this case, in the case of a game state in which a right-handed game can be played, only advantageous wins occur until the limit is reached, so that the player does not transition to a disadvantageous game state until the limit is reached, allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind. It is possible to increase the game value. However, until the limit is reached, there is a risk that the game will become less interesting because it will be a digestive task of generating a jackpot up to the limit number of times. Therefore, as in the above-described first embodiment, by imparting a game feature in which it becomes easier to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" if the pullback jackpot is won, first, the pullback period In addition to the playability of whether or not to pull back the jackpot inside, when the jackpot is pulled back, the game value to be obtained is increased while creating the playability of whether or not to win the ``set suggestion performance''. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment or the third embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot that can occur in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol match (16R or 4R in the first embodiment, 16R or 4R in the third embodiment, It was configured to be 16R or 6R). On the other hand, the number of rounds of the big win generated by the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of rounds of the big win generated by the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be clearly different. Specifically, for example, in the first special symbol, the number of rounds is always equal to or greater than the number of stages of the probability setting value, and the jackpot is won (easy to win), and in the second special symbol, the number of rounds is the probability. It is constructed so as to win (easily win) a jackpot less than the number of stages of the set value. By configuring in this way, when a left-handed game is played and a jackpot is won, the round corresponding to the probability setting value is always executed, so that the ``setting suggestion effect'' of the ``round match'' is executed. While the setting value can be guessed, the reliability of the ``setting suggestion effect'' of the ``round match'' due to the fact that the round corresponding to the probability setting value is not necessarily executed when a right-handed game is played and the jackpot is won. become deficient in Therefore, in order to pursue the accuracy of the "setting suggestion effect", we created a game that differentiates the shooting mode of the ball, and combined the type of special pattern (the number of rounds of the jackpot) and the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect". It is possible to improve the interest of the game by the various playability. Further, in the first embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type according to the first special symbol and the ratio of the jackpot type according to the second special symbol may be changed.

<Modification 15>
In the second embodiment, in the gaming state (that is, "probability variation state" or "time reduction state") in which dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, small wins that are most likely to be won are consecutively won. By doing so, it was configured to make it easier to win the execution lottery of "setting suggestion effect". On the other hand, in the gaming state where the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, if a loss with a lower occurrence frequency than a small win is selected, the winning probability of the "setting suggestion effect" in the subsequent game is increased ( For example, it may be configured to double).

<Modification 16>
In the second embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function is inactive, if the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function is inoperative again is won, the subsequent games , the contents of the ``setting suggestion performance'' that can be executed by winning a small prize are more specifically suggested. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, if a loss with a lower frequency of occurrence than the small win is selected, a small win is won based on the winning of the loss. The content of the "setting suggesting effect" that can be executed by pressing may be more specifically suggested.

<Modification 17>
In the second embodiment, the game state in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning auxiliary function is activated, the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function is not activated, or " In the time shortened state"), it is configured so that it is easy to win the execution lottery of the ``setting suggesting performance'' by successively winning small wins that are most likely to be won. On the other hand, the small winning game is won in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning auxiliary function is inactive, which is a game state in which the ball can win a prize in a small winning opening (not shown) when the small winning game is won. Only in this case, the execution lottery for the "setting suggestion effect" may be performed. As a result, winning in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the prize winning assisting function is not activated makes it easier for the player to experience an event that is advantageous to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above-described embodiments, by winning an unfavorable win, it is information about the pachinko machine 10, and is configured so as to suggest a probability set value that serves as a basis for determining whether the player should continue playing the game. . On the other hand, information other than the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10, which is advantageous for the player, may be notified (suggested). Specifically, the pachinko machine 10, such as the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 10, the frequency of winning the first start opening 64a, the frequency of winning the general winning opening 63, the winning efficiency of the large winning opening 65a, etc. It may be configured so as to report information beneficial to the player who plays the game.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is determined, the third pattern display device 81 additionally displays a pattern related to the "setting suggestion effect". . On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "setting suggesting effect" is executed by changing the always recognizable displayed object over time. Specifically, for example, the third symbol display device 81 changes the content of the character symbol that is always displayed to perform a "setting suggestion effect", or the display contents of the setting suggestion indicator provided on the game board 13 are displayed. , or by driving a display object that is always visible, making the display object hidden behind it visible and executing the “setting suggestion effect” on that display object. may

<Modification 20>
In each of the above embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the probability of winning the big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed. However, the probability setting value can be changed. The number of stages is not limited to six, and may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 21>
In each of the above embodiments, the case of changing the big win probability by changing the probability set value has been described, but the normal symbol win probability and the small win winning probability may be changed.

<Modification 22>
Also, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" is set. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

<Modification 23>
In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range. , the setting change processing is executed to change the probability setting value to the person concerned with the hall, etc., the person concerned with the hall etc. is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value is normal. Certain probability settings within a range may be forced.

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed using the setting key 501 . Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

<Modification 26>
In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, It may be possible to operate it by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 . Further, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

<Modification 28>
In each of the embodiments described above, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main controller 110 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111 .

<Modification 29>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) The setting regarding the degree of advantage to the player can be changed in a plurality of stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

<Modification 30>
In each of the embodiments described above, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

<Modification 31>
In the above embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the losing random numbers are set to continuous values, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit is determined by a range (for example, "0" or more "49" or less), and the control load of the main controller 110 is reduced. On the other hand, the random numbers (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers) that give the game value may be arranged not in a continuous manner but in a dispersed (dissipated) manner. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", the jackpot random number is set to "7,341,555,777,831" and the small hit random number is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low-probability state and the high-probability state) continuously, It is possible that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the likelihood of being fraudulently awarded a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number to which a game value is assigned from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap each other. You may set a jackpot random value. By configuring in this way, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot. can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 32>
In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type random number C2, etc. by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the random number generation IC whose update period is faster than the soft random numbers may be configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and to improve the security performance.

<Modification 33>
In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot random number value increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from set values "1" to "3", the jackpot random number value is increased by "2", while from set values "4" to "6", the jackpot random number value is set to "5". increase by increments. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be imparted by the setting difference can be greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with modulation due to the setting difference, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

<Modification 34>
In the above embodiment, it is configured to change the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small hit type is changed. It may be configured such that a setting difference is caused by the change.

<Modification 35>
In the above-described embodiment, the time reduction counter 203k common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used to count the number of executions of each special symbol in the "time reduction state". On the other hand, using a special figure 2 time-saving counter that counts only the number of times of variation effects of the second special symbol, and a total time-saving counter that counts the total number of times of variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol " It may be configured to count the number of dynamic display executions of each special symbol in the "time shortening state" to determine the end condition of the "time shortening state", or only the number of times of variation performance of the first special symbol. A special figure 1 hour-saving counter that counts is provided, and the "time shortening state" may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed, and the termination condition of the "time shortening state" may be determined. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 36>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, it may be configured to execute each special symbol in the order in which the dynamic display was acquired (in the order in which it was suspended), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be replaced by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be executed with higher priority.

<Modification 37>
In the above embodiment, along with the setting change, the random number that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number) is changed, and the changed amount is compensated for by the random number that does not give the game value (that is, the random number that does not give the game value). It was configured as On the other hand, when the random number that gives the game value (for example, the random number for the big win) is changed due to the change of the setting, the changed amount is ) may be configured to be compensated from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game value that can be imparted with a difference for each setting, provide a game with a sharpness for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set )Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot random number range")", " Each random number may be defined (set) so as to be aligned in the "range of the random numbers that fail". Here, as the "re-jackpot random number range", the increase in the jackpot random number value associated with the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increment of the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number value), and according to the setting change It is possible to fix the range of the random numbers that are not changed (that is, the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers that do not change even when the settings are changed). As a result, for example, in the success/failure determination control program, the basic success/failure determination of fixed random numbers is made common to all set values, and the increment of the jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. can be determined, the design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of man-hours for development can be reduced.

<Modification 39>
In the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", and "losing random number range". was On the other hand, each random number may be defined (set) in descending order (or ascending order) of the number of random numbers.

<Modification 40>
In the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", and "losing random number range". was On the other hand, the "jackpot random number range" that increases with the setting change is stipulated (set ). Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range", and "losing random number range". . By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). The range of random numbers that are not changed (that is, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for judging whether or not the small hit is correct, while making the judgment of the small hit random value common to all set values, the increment of the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value This facilitates control program design and reduces development man-hours.

<Modification 41>
In the above-described embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning a special symbol is improved (up 10 times). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", it may be configured to improve the small winning probability of the special symbols. Also, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", both the jackpot probability and the small win probability are improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times, and the small win probability is also 5 times). good.

<Modification 42>
In the second embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol is higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol , the winning probability of the small winning game may be configured to be the same.

<Modification 43>
In the above-described embodiment, the so-called loop-type game specification is used to maintain the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big win occurs when the "probability fluctuation state" is entered. On the other hand, even if any jackpot is won after the jackpot ends, a game in which a "probability fluctuation state" (so-called ST type) is given as a termination condition for executing dynamic display a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends. May be configured according to specifications. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the enhancement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 44>
In the above-described embodiment, all setting values are configured so that the jackpot probability is evenly increased (everything is increased by 10 times) when changing from the low probability state to the high probability state of the special symbols. On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each setting value (for example, setting value "1" is five times, setting value "2" is six times, ... setting value "6" is ten times, etc.). It may be configured as By configuring in this way, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a state with a high probability of special symbols, so that the phenomenon itself of quickly winning a big win game in a high probability state is a setting suggestion. Therefore, it is possible to create a game of how quickly a jackpot can be won in a high-probability state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<Modification 45>
In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbol, it is configured such that the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state). You may

<Modification 46>
In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for by the losing random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increment of the jackpot random number value may be compensated for by the small hit random number and the losing random number value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of big hit random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random numbers and the losing random numbers, and the change in the big hit random numbers is fixed. It is no longer necessary to fill from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from 1 for the amount of change in the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, when there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the ``setting suggestion performance'', the ``setting suggestion performance'' is performed at another timing (ending performance). On the other hand, when there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the ``setting suggestion performance'', the ``setting suggestion performance'' may be executed in another round that exists in the big win. In this case, even though it was selected to execute the ``setting suggestion effect'' in a round other than the round that matches the probability setting value, if the round does not exist, except for the round that matches the probability setting value Alternatively, it may be configured to perform the "setting suggestion effect" in another round.

<Modification 48>
In the above embodiment, a "setting suggesting effect" is provided as an effect suggesting a probability set value that can be set in multiple stages, and the player is suggested in the "setting suggesting effect" based on the probability set value and the lottery result. Was. On the other hand, it may be constructed such that multiple stages of events that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 are suggested to the player based on the lottery results. For example, any state (stage) of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 provided in a plurality of stages (for example, "normal game state", "latency probability change state", "probability change state" and "time reduction state") may be suggested, it may be suggested which state (step) of multiple stages of production, or it is configured to suggest which state of multiple stages of jackpot expectations. may

<Modification 49>
In the above embodiment, a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (that is, the jackpot type "variable probability A" or "variable probability B") and a disadvantageous jackpot that is less advantageous for the player than the advantageous jackpot (that is, the jackpot type "latent The number of jackpots is counted regardless of whether the jackpot is any one of “variable probability A”, “time saving A” or “rushing A”), and when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times, a disadvantageous jackpot is forcibly selected. It was configured to be On the other hand, it may be configured such that the limit count is added only to a specific jackpot, and the limit count is not counted for jackpots other than the specific jackpot. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot type "probable variable A" or a jackpot type "probable variable B", which are jackpots with a high degree of advantage for the player, occurs, the number of jackpots is counted, and the total number is a predetermined number. When the limit number of times is reached, a disadvantageous jackpot is forcibly selected. On the other hand, when a jackpot type "latency probability change A", a jackpot type "time reduction A", or a jackpot type "pierce A" (or a small hit), which is a jackpot (hit) with a low degree of advantage for the player, occurs. The number of big wins is not counted, and it is configured so as not to affect the limit number of times. By constructing in this way, when a jackpot type having a low advantage for the player is won, the jackpot advantageous to the player can be granted up to the limit number of times without being counted as the limit number of times. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the appearance of a jackpot with a low degree of advantage for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times, there is a 100% probability that a disadvantageous jackpot (that is, the jackpot type "time saving A" or "piercing A") is selected. rice field. On the other hand, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times, an unfavorable jackpot is not necessarily selected. It may be configured to increase the probability. Specifically, for example, before the limit is reached, the selection rate for the advantageous per is 80%, and the selection rate for the disadvantage is 20%. Configure so that the ratio is 80%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 51>
In the above-described first embodiment, as "at the time of reaching the limit", every time the number of special symbol jackpots reaches 6 times, only the jackpot type that does not generate the "probability fluctuation state" in the sixth jackpot is selected. had configured. On the other hand, as ``at the time of reaching the limit'', the jackpot type that generates the ``probability fluctuation state'' until the 6th jackpot of the number of special symbol hits can be selected, and when the next jackpot is won, i.e., the 7th jackpot. In the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, only jackpot types that do not cause the "probability fluctuation state" may be selected.

<Modification 52>
In the above-described embodiment, setting of the probability set value is suggested by whether the display contents displayed on the total number of winning balls display during the jackpot game are displayed in a general font or in a special typeface font. On the other hand, at the start of the jackpot, during the jackpot, and at the end of the jackpot, other displays are displayed, for example, a round number display indicating the number of rounds, a pattern display indicating the jackpot pattern, or during the round game. It may be configured such that setting suggestion of the probability set value is performed depending on the type of character pattern that appears. In addition, it may be configured such that setting of the probability set value is suggested by a display object displayed during the variable effect, such as a character pattern, a cut-in image, or a numerical display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the ``round start display'' at the time of the big win is changed from the ``normal round start effect'' to the ``remaining limit number suggesting effect'' to suggest the number of big wins until reaching the limit number of times. It was configured as On the other hand, at the start of the jackpot, during the jackpot, and at the end of the jackpot, other displays are displayed, for example, a round number display indicating the number of rounds, a pattern display indicating the jackpot pattern, or during the round game. The number of remaining limit times may be suggested according to the type of character pattern that appears. Further, the remaining limit number of times may be suggested by a display object displayed during the variable effect, such as a character design, a cut-in image, or a numerical display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 54>
In the above-described embodiment, every time a specific event condition is satisfied, that is, a prize is won during a jackpot game, the display content indicating the occurrence of the specific event is changed (that is, the display content of the total number of winning balls is changed). By displaying it in a general font or in a special typeface font), the setting suggestion of the probability setting value or the remaining limit number of times is suggested. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the set probability value or the remaining limit number of times is suggested based on the temporal change of the displayed object that changes with the lapse of time. Specifically, a so-called demo screen displayed first thing in the morning, or a special effect that is executed when a predetermined period of time elapses after the power is turned on by a real-time clock, etc., suggests the probability setting value or the remaining limit number of times. . With this configuration, even if a specific event condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion of a probability setting value or a suggestion of a remaining limit number of times is suggested at a predetermined timing, so that a player who confirms the suggestion can play a game. Motivation to play can be generated and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

<Modification 55>
In the above embodiment, it is configured to suggest the remaining limit number of times that the set value information of the probability set value or the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" can be selected by the establishment of the predetermined condition. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest information that is meaningful to the player or advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, even though it is a "probability fluctuation state", it suggests that it is a "latent probability fluctuation state" that does not notify that, or suggests that there is a continuous jackpot in the number of pending balls, or the remaining It may be configured to suggest the number of times of ST or the number of times of shortening of working hours, or to show a character image with a low appearance frequency and a rarity. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 56>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the "setting suggestion effect" is executed at the timing of "round match", when the remaining limit number of times matches the number of rounds, the "remaining limit number of times The direct value of the remaining limit number of times was displayed as a suggestion performance. On the other hand, the "remaining limit number-suggesting effect" may be configured to be performed with an ambiguous expression instead of a direct value. Specifically, similar to the "setting suggestion effect", the remaining limit number of times may be represented by expressions other than the direct value, such as "even-odd suggestion", "1 negative suggestion", and "456 suggestion". Then, depending on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive unfavorable hits), the contents of the "remaining limit number of times suggestive effect" are sequentially materialized. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after there is As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Also, at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, the variation start flag may be set to ON. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on, display is performed to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is caused to execute the variation effect on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command. can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of the image for one frame (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) at which drawing processing ends. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Also, a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the special pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Also, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines the reception of the continuous notice command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. , and other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be given an expectation that a big win will finally be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113 . As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, It may be stored in the RAM 223 .

Further, for example, the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening where the variable effect is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with two starting holes, the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, as starting holes for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or a plurality of three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, the RAM 203 has a corresponding reserved ball number counter for each starting port, and for each starting port, the reserved balls that are reserved according to the winning of the corresponding starting port are stored. You may make it count the number. Also, for each starting port, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the corresponding starting port may be set.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the command for the number of pending balls sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 to notify that the suspension has been performed with the winning of the starting port It may also include information indicating whether a hold has been made by winning a prize in the starting port. Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting variation may also include information indicating which starting port the variation effect is suspended. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the holding ball number command When the number of held balls is set to , and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing by 1 a counter of the number of retained balls for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning of each starting hole (starting winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to any starting opening is may include information indicating whether Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to which starting port. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each starting opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main controller 110 in association with the starting winning to the corresponding starting opening is stored. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start opening that detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each starting port can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won the start prize, in the look-ahead process, whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variable effect, It is possible to correctly determine a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a loss type in the case of a loss, etc., based on which start opening the winning prize is. In addition, when the variable performance based on the start winning to one starting port is given priority to the variable performance based on the starting winning to the other starting port, the variation based on the starting winning to the one starting port Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of suspension times of the fluctuation performance that will be the most recent big win can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command from the main control device 110 for the value of each counter obtained based on the starting winning to the starting port. When the start of the performance is determined, the continuous notice performance may be executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize was awarded. In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of starting openings, and in which a variable performance for winning a prize at one starting opening is executed preferentially over a variable rendering for winning a prize at another starting opening, The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the result of the prefetching of the counter value obtained for the prize winning at the start opening where the variable effect is executed. Thus, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning to the starting port with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting point with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the starting point with a high priority, the continuous warning effect will end soon. It is possible that there will be a situation where you do not. On the other hand, in this modification, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning to the starting port with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not determined for this variable effect. is not started, so you can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting opening for winning the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting opening is "4 ” may be any number other than . Also, the maximum number of held balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on the winning of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or by dividing the area into four. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is controlled by the light-emitting member. may be configured to notify the

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Group A: Easy to derive setting suggestions when a disadvantage hits before reaching the limit>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that transitions (or easily transitions) the game state after the end of the game to the first game state.

Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, the first win that transitions the game state after the win to the first game state that is advantageous for the player, and the game state after the win is changed from the first game state to the player. 2nd win which transits to the second game state with high advantage for the player, and counts the number of times the win occurs in any win. Until a predetermined number of wins occur, the first win and the second win can be derived as the types of wins. is not derived, and only the first hit is derived. By configuring in this way, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to (forcibly) transition to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672) )).

In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first win, which is less advantageous (disadvantageous) for the player than the second win, it is counted as one win, and the number of wins reaches a predetermined number. It is configured such that the remaining number of times (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "remaining number of hits") until reaching the point is reduced. In such a case, the player feels disappointment due to the occurrence of the first win that is disadvantageous to the player instead of the second win, which is advantageous to the player, even though the player has won a lot of effort, and the second win is not good for the player. The number of possible remaining wins decreases and the first win is forcibly generated. Coupled with the feeling of disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times, the motivation to play decreases and the game in the game machine is stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

The inventions of group A have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time saving A" or "latency probability change A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the first game state a first transition means to transition to (for example, transition to "time reduction state" or transition to "latency probability change state");
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game a second transition means for transitioning to a state (for example, transitioning to a "probability fluctuation state");
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
Count updating means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a gaming machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting gaming machine information related to the gaming machine to the player;
The determination means is
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, normal determination means (for example, success/failure determination when the limit counter 203h is less than "6");
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, arrival time determination means (for example, (judgement if the limit counter 203h is "6" or more);
The gaming machine information indicating means includes:
a derivation mode change means for changing the derivation mode of the gaming machine information from when the second lottery result is derived when the first lottery result is derived. .

According to the gaming machine A0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the determination information acquisition means detects the condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the second transition means shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state. When the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the number of derivation times of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Updated. Further, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. In addition, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result other than the second lottery result A lottery result may be derived. When the first lottery result is derived by derivation mode changing means provided in the game machine information suggesting means, the derivation mode of the game machine information is changed from when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number is reduced, the derivation mode of the game machine information is changed and executed from when the second lottery result is derived. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the information regarding the gaming machine is changed so that the player can obtain different information than when the second lottery result is derived. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine A0,
The derivation mode changing means is
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first lottery result is derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the derivation mode changing means, the gaming machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player is provided with the advantage of being able to easily know the information about the game machine, and the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by being harassed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
A setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine A2 characterized by suggesting information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information about the set value, which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the merit of increasing the decision factor, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine A3 is characterized in that the game machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. Even if the number until reaching the number decreases, the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number of forcibly deriving the lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) To facilitate derivation of game machine information when there is little or no difference between . As a result, for example, even if a first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player cannot obtain the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to give the merit of being easy to know, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information by the determination means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine A4, comprising a non-derivation means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived even in the first lottery result, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is drawn only by the player's own drawing. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A4,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, when the second lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is difficult to derive when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A0 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult to derive the gaming machine information. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous for the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, the derivation of the predetermined lottery result at least once) When there is a chance (exists), by making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it creates a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A5,
Continuous determination means for determining whether or not the first lottery results have been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized by facilitating derivation of the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the first lottery results are continuously derived by the continuation determining means. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when it is determined by the continuous determination means that the first lottery result is continuously derived. configured to That is, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To facilitate derivation of game machine information even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is continuously reduced. As a result, even if the first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player will not know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the advantage of making it easier for the player, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the continuous derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A5,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
disadvantageous number update means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the disadvantageous number counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine A7 is characterized in that when the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information can be easily derived.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the disadvantageous number of times counting means. is updated (initialized). When the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or more), the gaming machine information suggesting means derives the gaming machine information. configured for ease of use. That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. To facilitate derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of a first lottery result is equal to or greater than a predetermined number even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when many first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the first lottery results, which are more disadvantageous than the second lottery results, are derived more often. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A7,
A launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
a second ball-entering means (for example, a through gate 67) different from the first ball-entering means, into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
A ball-entering easy state in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball-entering means, and a ball-entering-difficult state in which a game ball is more difficult or impossible to enter into the first ball-entering means than in the ball-entering easy state. A movable means (for example, a normal electric terminal 64c) that can change to
and a drive means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means is
a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1 value) based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a second determination information acquiring means for acquiring second determination information (for example, a counter C4 value per normal figure) based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The determination means is
a first determination means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means;
a second determination means for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means;
The special game generation means is
changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means;
The drive means
driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means;
A game machine A8 characterized in that the movable means is driven so that the period during which the easy-to-enter state in the first game state is shorter than the period in which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means. A ball can be entered into a second ball entering means different from the ball means. Also, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Then, the movable means has a ball-entering easy state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball-entering means, and an entering state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the first ball-entering means from the easy-ball-entering state. The movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first determination information is acquired by the first determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, and the first determination information is acquired to the second ball entry means. The second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball. Then, the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is acquired by the second determination means also provided in the determination means. The second determination information acquired by the means is determined. Furthermore, the special game generation means changes the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the movable means is driven by the drive means based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the period during which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the first gaming state is longer than the period in which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the second gaming state. The movable means is driven so as to shorten. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means It is configured so that it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first judging means is derived, and the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is obtained. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know the information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine A8,
The second determination means is
It is characterized in that the probability that the movable means is driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the drive means in the second game state. Gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination means determines that the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the second game state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a decision opportunity by the first decision means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. is configured to Therefore, the first lottery result is derived in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first determination means, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know the information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A9,
The game machine A10 is characterized in that the counting means does not notify that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is configured so that the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number by the counting means. That is, the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated because the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, or is generated purely by deriving the first lottery result. It is configured so that the player cannot distinguish whether the

Conventionally, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, a first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to a second game state is won, while the predetermined lottery result is derived. Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result that shifts to the second game state. Therefore, immediately after the predetermined lottery result has been derived a predetermined number of times, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When the game is played in this state, it is possible to maximize the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived, and at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches a predetermined number, that is, at a predetermined time. After the number of times the lottery results have been derived reaches a predetermined number, and after at least one or more predetermined lottery results have been derived, the number of times the second lottery results can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of times the predetermined lottery results have been derived is not the maximum. Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived decreases. Therefore, when selecting a gaming machine for playing a game, a player who recognizes that it is at a timing other than immediately after the predetermined number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, may think that the gaming value obtained is decreasing. As a result, there is a risk that the gaming machine will avoid playing games and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine A10, it is configured so as not to notify the player that the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether the lottery is forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or simply by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is reached. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A10,
The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported. That is, it is configured so that the player cannot determine the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. As a result, even at a timing other than immediately after the number of draws of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, it is difficult for the player to avoid playing the game in the game machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine. There is

In any of gaming machines A8 to A11,
The launching means is
In the first game state, first shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a predetermined first shooting mode (for example, control related to a left-handed game);
In the second game state, second shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode (for example, control related to a right-handed game);
The first ball entering means
A first firing mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired in the first firing mode can enter;
A second firing mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which the game ball fired in the second firing mode can enter,
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined number The game machine A12 is characterized in that it is possible to derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the lottery result.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of the game machines A8 to A11, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is shot in a predetermined first shooting mode by the first shooting mode means provided in the shooting means, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is shot in the second shooting mode provided in the shooting means. The means shoots the game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. Further, the game ball launched in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball entering means as the first ball entering means, and the game ball launched in the second shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. The ball is configured to be able to enter the second shooting mode ball entering means as the ball entering means. When the game ball enters the first ball-entering means or the second-ball entering means in the second shooting mode, and when the number of times the counting means derives a predetermined lottery result is less than a predetermined number, the first determining means A first lottery result or a second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in the second shooting mode in the second game state, even if the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result is It is constructed so that it can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the second game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the second firing mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by an error or an error is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after reaching the predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A12,
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined A gaming machine A13 characterized in that the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result of.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means , the first lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in the first shooting mode in the first game state, the first lottery result is obtained even when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the first shooting mode ball entering means has reached the predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by an error or an error is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after reaching the predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<Group B: When the disadvantage hits before the limit is reached, the setting suggestions are materialized>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that changes the game state after the end of the game to the first game state.

Specifically, for example, as the type of winning, a first winning that transitions the game state after winning to a first game state, and a second winning that changes the game state after winning to a second game state. In preparation, the number of hits is counted regardless of the hit. Until a predetermined number of wins occur, the first win and the second win can be derived as the types of wins. is not derived, and only the first hit is derived. By configuring in this way, when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to transition to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295672)).

In such a game machine, even if the first win, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second win, is won, it is counted as one win, and the number of wins remains until the number of wins reaches a predetermined number. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "remaining hit count") is configured to decrease. In such a case, the player feels disappointment due to the occurrence of the first win that is disadvantageous to the player instead of the second win, which is advantageous to the player, even though the player has won a lot of effort, and the second win is not good for the player. The number of possible remaining wins decreases and the first win is forcibly generated. Coupled with the feeling of disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times, the motivation to play decreases and the game in the game machine is stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's desire to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time saving A" or "latency probability change A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the first game state a first transition means to transition to (for example, transition to "time reduction state" or transition to "latency probability change state");
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game a second transition means for transitioning to a state (for example, transitioning to a "probability fluctuation state");
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
Count updating means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a game machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting game machine information related to the game machine;
The determination means is
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, normal determination means (for example, success/failure determination when the limit counter 203h is less than "6");
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, arrival time determination means (for example, (judgement if the limit counter 203h is "6" or more);
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Suggestion embodying means (e.g. suggestion content lottery table 222f) capable of embodying the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived continuously, when the second lottery result is derived A game machine B0 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine B0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the determination information acquisition means detects the condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the second transition means shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state. When the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the number of derivation times of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Updated. Further, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. In addition, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result other than the second lottery result A lottery result may be derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the suggestion materializing means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information can be materialized when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number decreases, it becomes easier to recognize the gaming machine information more accurately than when the second lottery result is derived. Thus, even when the result of the first lottery is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that the information about the game machine can be easily recognized accurately, and the first lottery is more disadvantageous to the player than the result of the second lottery. The disappointment caused by deriving results can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

The ``suggestion materializing means capable of embodying the gaming machine information'' means, for example, direct contents (for example, ``immediate value suggestion'') so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. ), or when the content of the gaming machine information is abstracted (eg, “1 negative suggestion”) to make it easier for the player to understand (recognize) the content (eg, “1 negative suggestion”) embodied (detailed) (eg, "Direct price suggestion"), when displaying content that can be guessed from content that is difficult to guess from gaming machine information (for example, "456 suggestion"), gaming machine information from a state where it is difficult to visually recognize is derived in a readily visible state, and a case in which the gaming machine information is derived from an inaccurate state in a state in which the gaming machine information can be more accurately recognized is exemplified.

In gaming machine B0,
A setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine B1 characterized by suggesting information suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily recognize the information regarding the set value, which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result will be derived, in a concrete manner, and the player can enjoy the game in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the merit of increasing the number of factors for determining whether to continue or not, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is materialized when there is little or no difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of the first lottery is derived, the game machine information is easily materialized by the game machine information suggestion means when there is little or no difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number. be. That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. When the difference between the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for forcibly deriving the first lottery result is small or non-existent even when the number until reaching the number is reduced, gaming machine information can be recognized more accurately. As a result, even if the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can accurately obtain the information on the gaming machine. It is possible to give the advantage of being easy to recognize, and to alleviate the player's disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information when the determining means determines that the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine B3 characterized by comprising a non-derivation means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although this is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as Since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery results reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery results reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived from the lottery results, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is drawn only by the player's own drawing. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A gaming machine B4 characterized in that, when the second lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is abstracted when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, the game machine information is abstracted by the game machine information suggestion means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous to the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to accurately recognize game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, the derivation of the predetermined lottery result at least once) When there is a trigger, it is possible to make it difficult to accurately recognize the gaming machine information, thereby creating a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is accurately suggested and improving the interest of the game. , has the effect of

It should be noted that "abstraction of the game machine information" means, for example, the case where the content of the game machine information is displayed with indirect content (for example, "even-odd suggestion") to make it more difficult for the player to understand (recognize) the content of the game machine information. , a case of displaying content that is difficult to guess from the gaming machine information (for example, "1 negative suggestion"), a case of suggesting the gaming machine information in a state that is difficult to see, and the like.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B4,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery results have been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized by embodying the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the first lottery results are continuously derived by the continuation determining means. When the first lottery result is derived and the continuous determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the game machine information suggestion means materializes the game machine information. configured as That is, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. Even when the number of times until the number of times reaches the predetermined number decreases continuously, the game machine information can be recognized more accurately. As a result, even when the first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can accurately obtain the information on the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the continuous derivation of the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result, for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B4,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
disadvantageous number update means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the disadvantageous number counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine B6 is characterized in that when the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information is materialized.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the disadvantageous number of times counting means. is updated (initialized). Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage counting means is a predetermined number or more (for example, two times or more), the gaming machine information suggesting means causes the gaming machine information suggesting means to specify the specific gaming machine information. configured to be That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. Even if the number until reaching the number is reduced, the gaming machine information can be recognized more accurately when the number of times the first lottery result is derived is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, even when many first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation becomes closer to forcibly deriving the first lottery result, the player can accurately recognize the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result, is derived more often. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B6,
A launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
a second ball-entering means (for example, a through gate 67) different from the first ball-entering means, into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
A ball-entering easy state in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball-entering means, and a ball-entering-difficult state in which a game ball is more difficult or impossible to enter into the first ball-entering means than in the ball-entering easy state. A movable means (for example, a normal electric terminal 64c) that can change to
and a drive means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means is
a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1 value) based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a second determination information acquiring means for acquiring second determination information (for example, a counter C4 value per normal figure) based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The determination means is
a first determination means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means;
a second determination means for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means;
The special game generation means is
changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means;
The drive means
driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means;
The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the movable means is driven so that the period during which the ball-entering easy state is maintained in the first game state is shorter than the period during which the ball-entering easy state is maintained in the second game state.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means. A ball can be entered into a second ball entering means different from the ball means. Also, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Then, the movable means has a ball-entering easy state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball-entering means, and an entering state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the first ball-entering means from the easy-ball-entering state. The movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first determination information is acquired by the first determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, and the first determination information is acquired to the second ball entry means. The second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball. Then, the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is acquired by the second determination means also provided in the determination means. The second determination information acquired by the means is determined. Furthermore, the special game generation means changes the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the movable means is driven by the drive means based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the period during which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the first gaming state is longer than the period in which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the second gaming state. The movable means is driven so as to shorten. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means It is configured so that it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first judging means is derived, and the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is obtained. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine B7,
The second determination means is
It is characterized in that the probability that the movable means is driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the drive means in the second game state. Gaming machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination means determines that the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the second game state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a decision opportunity by the first decision means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. is configured to Therefore, the first lottery result is derived in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first determination means, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B8,
The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the counting means does not notify that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is configured so that the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number by the counting means. That is, the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated because the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, or is generated purely by deriving the first lottery result. It is configured so that the player cannot discriminate whether or not.

Conventionally, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, a first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to a second game state is won, while the predetermined lottery result is derived. Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result that shifts to the second game state. Therefore, immediately after the predetermined lottery result has been derived a predetermined number of times, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When the game is played in this state, it is possible to maximize the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived, and at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches a predetermined number, that is, at a predetermined time. After the number of times the lottery results have been derived reaches a predetermined number, and after at least one or more predetermined lottery results have been derived, the number of times the second lottery results can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of times the predetermined lottery results have been derived is not the maximum. Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived decreases. Therefore, when selecting a gaming machine for playing a game, a player who recognizes that it is at a timing other than immediately after the predetermined number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, may think that the gaming value obtained is decreasing. As a result, there is a risk that the gaming machine will avoid playing games and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine B9, it is configured so as not to notify the player that the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether the lottery is forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or simply by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the timing immediately after reaching the predetermined number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result, so that even if it is a timing other than immediately after the predetermined number of derivations of the lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In gaming machine B9,
A gaming machine B10 characterized in that the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported. That is, it is configured so that the player cannot determine the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. As a result, even at a timing other than immediately after the number of draws of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, it is difficult for the player to avoid playing the game in the game machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine. There is

In any of game machines B7 to B10,
The launching means is
In the first game state, first shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a predetermined first shooting mode (for example, control related to a left-handed game);
In the second game state, second shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode (for example, control related to a right-handed game);
The first ball entering means
A first firing mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired in the first firing mode can enter;
a second firing mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which the game ball fired in the second firing mode can enter;
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined number A game machine B11 characterized in that the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as the lottery result.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of the game machines B7 to B10, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is shot in a predetermined first shooting mode by the first shooting mode means provided in the shooting means, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is shot in the second shooting mode provided in the shooting means. The means shoots the game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. Further, the game ball launched in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball entering means as the first ball entering means, and the game ball launched in the second shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. It is configured to be able to enter a ball into the ball entering means in the second shooting mode as the ball entering means. When the game ball enters the first ball-entering means or the second-ball entering means in the second shooting mode, and when the number of times the counting means derives a predetermined lottery result is less than a predetermined number, the first determining means A first lottery result or a second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, even when a game ball enters the second shooting mode ball entering means in the second game state, the first lottery result can be derived and the game state can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the second game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the second firing mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by a reason or is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the timing immediately after reaching the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B11,
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined A gaming machine B12, characterized in that the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result of.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means , the first lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in the first shooting mode in the first game state, the first lottery result is obtained even when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the first shooting mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by a reason or is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the timing immediately after reaching the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<C group: Change setting suggestions by pulling back when limit is reached>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that changes the game state after the end of the game to the first game state.

Specifically, for example, as the type of winning, a first winning that transitions the game state after winning to a first game state, and a second winning that changes the game state after winning to a second game state. In preparation, the number of hits is counted regardless of the hit. Until a predetermined number of wins occur, the first win and the second win can be derived as the types of wins. is not derived, and only the first hit is derived. By configuring in this way, when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to transition to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295672)).

In such a game machine, even if the first win, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second win, is won, it is counted as one win, and the number of wins remains until the number of wins reaches a predetermined number. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "remaining hit count") is configured to decrease. In such a case, the player feels disappointment due to the occurrence of the first win that is disadvantageous to the player instead of the second win, which is advantageous to the player, even though the player has won a lot of effort, and the second win is not good for the player. The number of possible remaining wins decreases, and the first win is forcibly generated. Coupled with the feeling of disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times, the desire to play is reduced, and the player stops playing the game in the game machine. There is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

The invention of group C was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time saving A" or "latency probability change A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the first game state a first transition means to transition to (for example, transition to "time reduction state" or transition to "latency probability change state");
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game a second transition means for transitioning to a state (for example, transitioning to a "probability fluctuation state");
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
Count updating means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a game machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting game machine information related to the game machine;
The determination means is
normal determination means capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result is less than the predetermined number;
an arrival time determining means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. prepared,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
When the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state shifted by the arrival time determination means deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result, the game machine information from before that. (for example, increasing the winning probability of the "setting suggestion effect" by incrementing the pull-back counter 223h).

According to the gaming machine C0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can occur, and the determination information acquisition means detects the condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when a second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, the second transition means shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state. When the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the number of derivation times of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Updated. Further, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. In addition, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result other than the second lottery result A lottery result may be derived. When a predetermined lottery result is derived during the transition to the first game state by deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result by the arrival time determination means, a derivation provided in the game machine information suggesting means is performed. The facilitating means makes it easier to derive the gaming machine information than before. That is, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again in the first game state to which the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is derived to the player in subsequent games. easier to be As a result, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. To improve the interest of a game by creating a game property of how to derive a predetermined lottery result in a first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number. has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine C0,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Gaming machine information lottery means (e.g., setting suggesting lottery counter 223f) for determining whether to derive the gaming machine information with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (e.g., derivation of a predetermined lottery result) ), with
The derivation facilitation means is
A gaming machine comprising probability increasing means for increasing the predetermined probability in the gaming machine information lottery means (e.g., increasing the winning probability of the "set suggestion effect" based on the increase in the value of the withdrawal counter 223h). C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the game machine information lottery means provided in the game machine information suggestion means randomly determines whether or not to derive the game machine information with a predetermined probability. Then, the predetermined probability in the game machine information lottery means is increased by the probability information means provided in the derivation facilitation means. As a result, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again in the first game state which is executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the execution probability of the gaming machine information increases. provides the advantage of making it easy to know information about the game machine, and the game property of how to derive the predetermined lottery result in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is possible to create and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C0 or C1,
A third game state (for example, "normal game state") that is more disadvantageous (lower in advantage) for the player than the first game state can be generated,
The derivation facilitation means is
During (during) the first game state or the second game state, a facilitating continuation means (for example, setting the value of the withdrawal counter 223h to "1") that maintains a state in which it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. maintained above) and
and facilitation termination means (for example, clearing the pullback counter 223h to "0") for terminating the state in which the gaming machine information is easily derived when the game state is shifted to the third game state. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third game state that is more disadvantageous (less advantageous) for the player than the first game state can occur, and the facilitating continuation means provided in the withdrawal facilitating means allows the first game state or the second game state to be generated. During the game state (while it continues), the state in which the gaming machine information is easily derived is maintained. The state in which it is easy to derive gaming machine information is terminated. Thus, before shifting to the third game state in which the state in which the gaming machine information is likely to be derived ends, the game determines whether the gaming machine information is derived in the first game state or the second game state in which the gaming machine information is likely to be derived. There is an effect that it is possible to create sexuality and improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
A pullback counting means (for example, a pullback counter 223h) that counts the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means,
The derivation facilitation means is
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the judgment result of the arrival time judgment means in the pullback counting means is equal to or greater than a prescribed number, the game machine information can be easily derived. Characteristic game machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pullback counting means counts the number of times a predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determining means. Then, the derivation facilitation means derives the gaming machine information when the number of times a predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means in the withdrawal number means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. configured for ease of use. That is, in the first game state which is executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the game machine information is easily derived when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result again is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Thus, in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived again is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the player can obtain the information about the gaming machine. The advantage of being easy to know is given, and the game property of how to derive the predetermined lottery result in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number is created to make the game more enjoyable. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first lottery result is derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that the information about the game machine can be easily known, and the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by being harassed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C4,
A setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine C5 characterized by suggesting information suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information about the set value, which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the merit of increasing the decision factor, and to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C5,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the gaming machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first lottery result is derived.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. When the difference between the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for forcibly deriving the first lottery result is small or non-existent even when the number until reaching the number is reduced, gaming machine information to facilitate the derivation of As a result, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C6,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information by the determination means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A game machine C7 characterized by comprising a non-derivation means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as Since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number is the one that arrives, the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived even in the result of one lottery, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is drawn only by the player's own drawing. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C7,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, when the second lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is difficult to derive when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous to the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, the derivation of the predetermined lottery result at least once) When there is a trigger (existence of opportunity), by making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it creates a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C8,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery results have been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized by facilitating derivation of the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the first lottery results are continuously derived by the continuation determining means. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when it is determined by the continuous determination means that the first lottery result is continuously derived. configured to That is, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To facilitate derivation of game machine information even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is continuously reduced. As a result, even if the first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player will not know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the advantage of making it easier for the player, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the continuous derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C8,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
disadvantageous number update means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the disadvantageous number counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine C10 is characterized in that when the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information can be easily derived.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the disadvantageous number of times counting means. is updated (initialized). When the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information suggesting means is configured to facilitate the derivation of the game machine information. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. To facilitate derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of a first lottery result is equal to or greater than a predetermined number even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when many first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the first lottery results, which are more disadvantageous than the second lottery results, are derived more often. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C10,
A launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
a second ball-entering means (for example, a through gate 67) different from the first ball-entering means, into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
A ball-entering easy state in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball-entering means, and a ball-entering-difficult state in which a game ball is more difficult or impossible to enter into the first ball-entering means than in the ball-entering easy state. A movable means (for example, a normal electric terminal 64c) that can change to
and a drive means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means is
a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1 value) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means;
A second determination information acquisition means for acquiring second determination information (for example, a counter C4 value per normal figure) based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means,
The determination means is
a first determination means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means;
a second determination means for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means;
The special game generation means is
changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means;
The drive means
driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means;
A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the movable means is driven so that the period during which the easy-to-enter state in the first game state is shorter than the period in which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means. A ball can be entered into a second ball entering means different from the ball means. Also, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Then, the movable means has a ball-entering easy state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball-entering means, and an entering state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the first ball-entering means from the easy-ball-entering state. The movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first determination information is acquired by the first determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, and the first determination information is acquired to the second ball entry means. The second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball. Then, the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is acquired by the second determination means also provided in the determination means. The second determination information acquired by the means is determined. Furthermore, the special game generation means changes the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the movable means is driven by the drive means based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the period during which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the first gaming state is longer than the period in which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the second gaming state. The movable means is driven so as to shorten. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means It is configured so that it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first judging means is derived, and the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is obtained. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know the information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine C11,
The second determination means is
It is characterized in that the probability that said movable means is driven by said driving means in said first game state is lower than the probability that said movable means is driven by said driving means in said second game state. Gaming machine C12.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination means determines that the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the second game state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a decision opportunity by the first decision means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. is configured to Therefore, the first lottery result is derived in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first determination means, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know the information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C12,
The game machine C13 is characterized in that the counting means does not notify that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the counting means is configured not to inform that the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number. That is, the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated because the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, or is generated purely by deriving the first lottery result. It is configured so that the player cannot discriminate whether or not.

Conventionally, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, a first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to a second game state is won, while the predetermined lottery result is derived. Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result that shifts to the second game state. Therefore, immediately after the predetermined lottery result has been derived a predetermined number of times, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When the game is played in this state, it is possible to maximize the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived, and at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches a predetermined number, that is, at a predetermined time. After the number of times the lottery results have been derived reaches a predetermined number and after at least one or more predetermined lottery results have been derived, the number of times the second lottery results can be derived is not the maximum, and the predetermined number of times the lottery results have been derived Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived decreases. Therefore, at the time of selecting a gaming machine for playing a game, a player who recognizes that it is at a timing other than immediately after the predetermined number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number may think that the gaming value obtained is decreasing. As a result, there is a risk that the gaming machine will avoid playing games and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C13, it is configured so as not to inform the player that the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether the lottery is forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or simply by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is reached. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C13,
The game machine C14 is characterized in that the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported. That is, it is configured so that the player cannot determine the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. As a result, even at a timing other than immediately after the number of draws of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, it is difficult for the player to avoid playing the game in the game machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine. There is

In any of gaming machines C11 to C14,
The launching means is
In the first game state, first shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a predetermined first shooting mode (for example, control related to a left-handed game);
In the second game state, second shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode (for example, control related to a right-handed game);
The first ball entering means
A first firing mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired in the first firing mode can enter;
a second firing mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which the game ball fired in the second firing mode can enter;
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined number A gaming machine C15 characterized in that the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as the lottery result.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is shot in a predetermined first shooting mode by the first shooting mode means provided in the shooting means, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is shot in the second shooting mode provided in the shooting means. The means shoots the game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. Further, the game ball launched in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball entering means as the first ball entering means, and the game ball launched in the second shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. The ball is configured to be able to enter the second shooting mode ball entering means as the ball entering means. When the game ball enters the first ball-entering means or the second-ball entering means in the second shooting mode, and when the number of times the counting means derives a predetermined lottery result is less than a predetermined number, the first determining means A first lottery result or a second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, even if a game ball enters the second shooting mode ball entering means in the second game state, the first lottery result can be derived and the game state can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the second game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the second firing mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by an error or an error is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after reaching the predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C15,
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined A game machine C16 characterized in that the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result of.

According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means , the first lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in the first shooting mode in the first game state, the first lottery result is obtained even when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the first shooting mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by a reason or is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the timing immediately after reaching the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<D Group: Retraction at the time of reaching the limit embodies setting suggestions>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that changes the game state after the end of the game to the first game state.

Specifically, for example, as the type of winning, a first winning that transitions the game state after winning to a first game state, and a second winning that changes the game state after winning to a second game state. In preparation, the number of hits is counted regardless of the hit. Until a predetermined number of wins occur, the first win and the second win can be derived as the types of wins. is not derived, and only the first hit is derived. By configuring in this way, when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to transition to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295672)).

In such a game machine, even if the first win, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second win, is won, it is counted as one win, and the number of wins remains until the number of wins reaches a predetermined number. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "remaining hit count") is configured to decrease. In such a case, the player feels disappointment due to the occurrence of the first win that is disadvantageous to the player instead of the second win, which is advantageous to the player, even though the player has won a lot of effort, and the second win is not good for the player. The number of possible remaining wins decreases and the first win is forcibly generated. Coupled with the feeling of disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times, the motivation to play decreases and the game in the game machine is stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

The invention of Group D was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's desire to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time saving A" or "latency probability change A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the first game state a first transition means to transition to (for example, transition to "time reduction state" or transition to "latency probability change state");
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game a second transition means for transitioning to a state (for example, transitioning to a "probability fluctuation state");
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
Count updating means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a game machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting game machine information related to the game machine,
The determination means is
normal determination means capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result is less than the predetermined number;
an arrival time determining means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. prepared,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
When the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means, a suggestion materialization means (for example, a pullback counter 223h) capable of embodying the gaming machine information before that is derived. , directly increasing the winning probability of the ``setting suggestion effect'' by adding .

According to the gaming machine D0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can occur, and the determination information acquisition means detects the condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when a second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, the second transition means shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state. Then, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Updated. Further, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. In addition, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result other than the second lottery result A lottery result may be derived. Then, when a predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determining means, the suggestion materializing means provided in the game machine information suggesting means causes the game machine information to be specified before that. can be made That is, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again during the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the game machine information can be more accurately recognized in subsequent games. Become. As a result, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the player can easily recognize the information regarding the gaming machine. To improve the amusement of the game by creating a game property of how to derive a predetermined lottery result in a first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

The ``suggestion materializing means for materializing the gaming machine information'' is, for example, direct content (for example, ``immediate value suggestion'') that makes it easier for the player to understand (recognize) the content of the gaming machine information. ), or when the content of the gaming machine information is abstracted (eg, “1 negative suggestion”) to make it easier for the player to understand (recognize) the content (eg, “1 negative suggestion”) embodied (detailed) (eg, "Direct price suggestion"), when displaying content that can be guessed from content that is difficult to guess from gaming machine information (for example, "456 suggestion"), gaming machine information from a state where it is difficult to visually recognize is suggested in an easily visible state.

In gaming machine D0,
Gaming machine information lottery means (e.g., setting suggesting lottery counter 223f) for determining whether to derive the gaming machine information with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (e.g., derivation of a predetermined lottery result) )and,
When the game machine information execution lottery is won, predetermined normal game machine information (for example, "even and odd suggestion" effect) and special game machine information (for example, , "immediate price suggestion" production) and information selection means (for example, suggestion content lottery counter 223i),
The suggestion materializing means includes:
A special selection probability increasing means for increasing the selection probability of the special game machine information in the information selection means (for example, increasing the winning probability of the "immediate price suggestion" effect based on the increase in the value of the withdrawal counter 223h). A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the game machine information lottery means provided in the game machine information suggestion means randomly determines whether or not to derive the game machine information with a predetermined probability. In addition, when a lottery for execution of game machine information is won, the information selection means derives either predetermined normal game machine information or special game machine information in which information about a game is embodied from the normal game machine information. be done. Then, the special selection probability increasing means provided in the suggestion materializing means increases the selection probability of the special game machine information in the information selecting means. Thus, in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again, the information regarding the game machine is more specific than the normal game machine information. Since the execution probability of the special game machine information is increased, a merit is given that the information on the game machine can be easily and accurately recognized by the player, and how the execution is executed when the prescribed lottery result reaches the prescribed number. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by creating a game property of deriving a predetermined lottery result in the first game state.

In gaming machine D1,
A third game state (for example, "normal game state") that is more disadvantageous (lower in advantage) for the player than the first game state can be generated,
The suggestion materializing means includes:
During (during) the first game state or the second game state, an embodiment continuation means (for example, setting the value of the withdrawal counter 223h to "1 ) and
and an embodiment termination means (for example, clearing the withdrawal counter 223h to "0") for terminating the state in which the special game machine information is easily derived when the game state is shifted to the third game state. game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third game state which is more disadvantageous (less advantageous) for the player than the first game state can occur, and the first game state or the second game state can be generated by the embodiment continuation means provided in the suggestion embodiment means. During the game state (while it continues), the state in which the special game machine information is easily derived is maintained, and when the transition to the third game state is made by the materialization end means provided in the suggestion materialization means. , the state in which it is easy to derive the special game machine information is ended. Thus, the special game machine information is suggested in the first game state or the second game state in which the special game machine information is likely to be derived before shifting to the third game state in which the state in which the special game machine information is likely to be derived ends. There is an effect that it is possible to create such a game property and improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
A pullback counting means (for example, a pullback counter 223h) that counts the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means,
The suggestion materializing means includes:
It is easy to derive the special game machine information when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means in the pullback counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the withdrawal counting means counts the number of times a predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means. Then, the suggestion materializing means derives the special game machine information when the number of times a predetermined lottery result is derived during the first game state based on the determination result of the arrival time determining means in the withdrawal number means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. configured to be easily That is, in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the special game machine information is made easier to derive when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result again is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. . As a result, in the first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived again is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the player receives the information regarding the gaming machine. A merit of facilitating accurate recognition is given, and a game property is created as to how a predetermined lottery result is derived in a first game state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number. , there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first lottery result is derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that the information about the game machine can be easily known, and the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by being harassed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D4,
A setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine D5 characterized by suggesting information suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information about the set value, which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the merit of increasing the decision factor, and to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D5,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the gaming machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first lottery result is derived.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machines D0 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggesting means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous to the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. When the difference between the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for forcibly deriving the first lottery result is small or absent even when the number until reaching the number is reduced, gaming machine information to facilitate the derivation of As a result, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D6,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information by the determination means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine D7 characterized by comprising non-suggestion means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machines D0 to D6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as Since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number is the one that arrives, the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived even in the result of one lottery, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is drawn only by the player's own drawing. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D7,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that, when the second lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is difficult to derive when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machines D0 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult to derive the gaming machine information. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous to the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, the derivation of the predetermined lottery result at least once) When there is a trigger (existence of opportunity), by making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it creates a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D8,
Continuous determination means for determining whether or not the first lottery results have been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized by facilitating derivation of the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine D9.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D8,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
disadvantageous number update means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the disadvantageous number counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine D10 is characterized in that when the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information can be easily derived.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the disadvantageous number of times counting means. is updated (initialized). When the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information suggesting means is configured to facilitate the derivation of the game machine information. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. To facilitate derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of a first lottery result is equal to or greater than a predetermined number even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when many first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the first lottery results, which are more disadvantageous than the second lottery results, are derived more often. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D10,
A launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
a second ball-entering means (for example, a through gate 67) different from the first ball-entering means, into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
A ball-entering easy state in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball-entering means, and a ball-entering-difficult state in which a game ball is more difficult or impossible to enter into the first ball-entering means than in the ball-entering easy state. A movable means (for example, a normal electric terminal 64c) that can change to
and a drive means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means is
a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1 value) based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a second determination information acquiring means for acquiring second determination information (for example, a counter C4 value per normal figure) based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The determination means is
a first determination means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means;
a second determination means for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means;
The special game generation means is
changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means;
The drive means
driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means;
A game machine D11 characterized in that the movable means is driven so that the period during which the easy-to-enter state in the first game state is shorter than the period in which the easy-to-enter state is in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball-entering means. A ball can be entered into a second ball entering means different from the ball means. Also, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Then, the movable means has a ball-entering easy state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball-entering means, and an entering state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the first ball-entering means from the easy-ball-entering state. The movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first determination information is acquired by the first determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, and the first determination information is acquired to the second ball entry means. The second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball. Then, the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is acquired by the second determination means also provided in the determination means. The second determination information acquired by the means is determined. Furthermore, the special game generation means changes the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the movable means is driven by the drive means based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the period during which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the first gaming state is longer than the period in which the easy-to-ball-enter state is in the second gaming state. The movable means is driven so as to shorten. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means It is configured so that it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first judging means is derived, and the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is obtained. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D11,
The second determination means is
It is characterized in that the probability that said movable means is driven by said driving means in said first game state is lower than the probability that said movable means is driven by said driving means in said second game state. A game machine D12.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination means determines that the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means will be driven by the drive means in the second game state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a decision opportunity by the first decision means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. is configured to Therefore, the first lottery result is derived in which the game state after the special game state shifts from the second game state to the first game state in which it is difficult to obtain a judgment opportunity by the first determination means, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result that shifts to the first game state is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know the information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result for the player. Disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D12,
The game machine D13 is characterized in that the counting means does not notify that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is configured so that the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number by the counting means. That is, the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated because the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, or is generated purely by deriving the first lottery result. It is configured so that the player cannot discriminate whether or not.

Conventionally, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, a first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to a second game state is won, while the predetermined lottery result is derived. Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result that shifts to the second game state. Therefore, immediately after the predetermined lottery result has been derived a predetermined number of times, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When the game is played in this state, it is possible to maximize the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived, and at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches a predetermined number, that is, at a predetermined time. After the number of times the lottery results have been derived reaches a predetermined number and after at least one or more predetermined lottery results have been derived, the number of times the second lottery results can be derived is not the maximum, and the predetermined number of times the lottery results have been derived Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived decreases. Therefore, at the time of selecting a gaming machine for playing a game, a player who recognizes that it is at a timing other than immediately after the predetermined number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined number may think that the gaming value obtained is decreasing. As a result, there is a risk that the gaming machine will avoid playing games and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine D13, it is configured so as not to inform the player that the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery results has reached a predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the predetermined number of derivations of the lottery results. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether the lottery is forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or simply by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is reached. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D13,
The game machine D14 is characterized in that the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D13, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported. That is, it is configured so that the player cannot determine the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. As a result, even at a timing other than immediately after the number of draws of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, it is difficult for people to avoid playing games in the gaming machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. There is

In any one of gaming machines D11 to D14,
The launching means is
In the first game state, first shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a predetermined first shooting mode (for example, control related to a left-handed game);
In the second game state, second shooting mode means for shooting a game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode (for example, control related to a right-handed game);
The first ball entering means
A first firing mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired in the first firing mode can enter;
a second firing mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which the game ball fired in the second firing mode can enter;
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined number The gaming machine D15 is characterized in that it is possible to derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the lottery result.

According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D11 to D14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is shot in a predetermined first shooting mode by the first shooting mode means provided in the shooting means, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is shot in the second shooting mode provided in the shooting means. The means shoots the game ball in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. Further, the game ball launched in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball entering means as the first ball entering means, and the game ball launched in the second shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. The ball is configured to be able to enter the second shooting mode ball entering means as the ball entering means. When the game ball enters the first ball-entering means or the second-ball entering means in the second shooting mode, and when the number of times the counting means derives a predetermined lottery result is less than a predetermined number, the first determining means A first lottery result or a second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, even when a game ball enters the second shooting mode ball entering means in the second game state, the first lottery result can be derived and the game state can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the second game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the second firing mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by a reason or is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the timing immediately after reaching the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D15,
The first determination means is
When the game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined A gaming machine D16 characterized in that the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result of.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the first shooting mode ball entering means or the second shooting mode ball entering means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means , the first lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in the first shooting mode in the first game state, the first lottery result is obtained even when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball entering the first shooting mode ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. To make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether an error is forcibly generated by a reason or is caused purely by deriving the result of the first lottery. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the timing immediately after reaching the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<Group E: If the number of rounds is less than the set number of stages, change the setting suggestion timing>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines, various effect images corresponding to game specifications are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, there is a tendency to diversify the timing of displaying on the display device in order to further improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-070451)).

However, when designing the game specifications so as to correspond to the timing of executing the effects, there is a risk that the design of the game specifications will be restricted and the degree of freedom in design will be reduced.

The inventions of Group E have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

game machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for deriving game machine information (for example, probability set value) indicating which state the game machine is in in which of the plurality of stages;
a timing selection means (for example, a suggestion content lottery counter 223i) for selecting a timing for deriving the gaming machine information by the gaming machine information suggesting means;
a special performance lottery means (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) for randomly determining whether or not to execute a predetermined special performance (for example, a jackpot performance);
Based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, a special effect execution means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) for executing the special effect,
The special production execution means is
a first effect mode execution means for executing a predetermined first effect mode (for example, a 16-round jackpot) as the special effect;
As the special effect, a second effect mode (for example, 7 rounds jackpot) different from the first effect mode (any one or more of the effect content, the effect period, the number of times of effect, etc. is different) is executed. comprising means and
The timing selection means is
A special effect time selection means (for example, "setting suggestion effect" at each effect timing of the jackpot effect) for selecting one of the timings of the special effect as the timing of deriving the gaming machine information;
Timing adjustment means for deriving the gaming machine information at the timing that will certainly arrive in the special performance when the timing selected by the special performance time selection means does not arrive (for example, the probability setting value in the case of winning the 4th round jackpot) A gaming machine E0 characterized by comprising: 'setting suggesting effect' of '6' is executed in an ending effect);

According to the gaming machine E0, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives the gaming machine information indicating in which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages. Information derivation timing is selected. A special performance lottery means draws lots as to whether or not a predetermined special performance is to be executed, and the special performance execution means executes the special performance based on the lottery result of the special performance lottery means. Further, a predetermined first effect mode is executed as a special effect by the first effect mode execution means provided in the special effect execution means, and a special effect mode is executed by the second effect mode execution means provided in the special effect execution means. As an effect, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed. Here, one of the timings of the special performance is selected as the derivation timing of the game machine information by the special performance time selection means provided in the timing selection means, and the timing selected by the special performance time selection means arrives. If not, the timing adjustment means provided in the timing selection means derives the game machine information at the timing that always arrives in the special performance. As a result, it is possible to reliably derive the gaming machine information during execution of a special effect based on any game specifications. As a result, the game specifications of the game machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the game machine information, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications can be improved.

In gaming machine E0,
The special production execution means is
As the special performance,
An introductory effect (for example, an opening effect) executed at the beginning,
After the execution of the introductory effect, a staged effect (for example, each round effect) for notifying the progress of the special effect in a plurality of stages;
After execution of the step production, a transition production (for example, ending production) indicating that the special production is shifted to another production (for example, variable production) is configured to be executable,
The second production mode execution means is
As the second effect mode, the step effect is executed less than the first effect mode by the first effect mode executing means,
The timing adjusting means is
When the second effect mode is executed by the second effect mode executing means, when the timing selected by the special effect time selection means does not come in the second effect mode, the introduction effect, the step effect, or The game machine E1 is characterized in that the game machine information is derived at any timing of the transition performance.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as special effects executed by the special effect executing means, there are an introductory effect executed at the beginning of the special effect, a staged effect in which the progress of the special effect is notified in a plurality of stages after the execution of the introductory effect, and After execution of the step performance, a transition performance indicating transition from the special performance to another performance is executable. Then, the second effect mode executing means executes the stepped effect as the second effect mode less than the first effect mode by the first effect mode executing means. Here, when the second performance mode is executed by the second performance mode executing means, when the timing selected by the special performance time selection means does not come in the second performance mode, the timing adjusting means controls the introduction performance, The game machine information is derived at the timing of either step performance or transition performance. As a result, it is possible to reliably derive the game machine information at any timing of the introduction performance, stage selection, or transition performance of the special performance at the time of execution of the special performance based on any game specifications. As a result, the game specifications of the game machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the game machine information, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications can be improved.

In gaming machine E1,
The first effect mode execution means and the second effect mode execution means are
configured to execute at least one of the introduction effect or the transition effect,
The timing adjusting means is
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is derived in the introduction performance or the transition performance when the timing selected by the special performance selecting means does not come.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the introduction effect and the transition effect is executed by the first effect mode execution means and the second effect mode execution means. Here, when the timing selected by the special effect selection means does not arrive, the timing adjusting means derives the gaming machine information in the introduction effect or the derivation effect. As a result, it is possible to reliably derive the gaming machine information in either the introduction performance or the transition performance that always comes in the special performance at the time of execution of the special performance based on any game specifications. As a result, the game specifications of the game machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the game machine information, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications can be improved.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E2,
The gaming machine E3 is characterized by comprising derivation lottery means (for example, setting suggesting lottery counter 223f) for determining whether or not to derive the gaming machine information.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the derivation lottery means determines whether or not to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game element that determines whether the game machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
By deriving the game machine information at the stage of the stage presentation corresponding to the stage of the game machine information, a stage match suggesting means (for example, Execution of "setting suggestion effect" by 6 rounds at probability setting value "6"),
The timing adjusting means is
When the game machine information cannot be derived at the stage of the stage performance corresponding to the stage of the game machine information by the stage match suggesting means, any one of the introduction performance, the other stage performance, or the transition performance is performed. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the gaming machine information is derived at timing.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by deriving the game machine information at the stage of the stage performance corresponding to the stage of the game machine information by means of the step coincidence suggesting means provided in the game machine information suggesting means, the game machine is provided with a plurality of stages. state is suggested. Then, when the stage coincidence suggesting means cannot derive the gaming machine information at the stage of the stage performance corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information, the timing adjustment means performs any of the introduction performance, the other stage performance, or the transition performance. The gaming machine information is derived at the timing of That is, in a gaming machine configured to suggest which of the plurality of stages the gaming machine is in by executing the gaming machine information in stages of stage presentation corresponding to the stages of the gaming machine information, When trying to derive the game machine information, even when the stage performance corresponding to the stage of the game machine information is not executed, the game machine information can be reliably derived when executing other performance in the special performance. becomes. As a result, it is possible to reliably derive the gaming machine information in either the introduction performance or the transition performance that always comes in the special performance at the time of execution of the special performance based on any game specifications. As a result, the game specifications of the game machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the game machine information, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications can be improved.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E4,
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a set value related to the probability that the special effect is derived by the special effect lottery means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine E5, characterized in that it is suggestive information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability of deriving the special effect by the special effect lottery means. The gaming machine information is suggestive information that suggests the set value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, it is possible to reliably suggest to the player the suggestive information that can be a factor in determining whether or not the player wants to continue playing the game on the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that the attraction of the game can be enhanced by appropriately performing the performance selected by lottery.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E5,
A predetermined first game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state");
A second game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state") that is less advantageous for the player than the first game state can be generated,
A first transition means (for example, "time transition to "shortening state" or transition to "latency probability variation state");
Second transition means (for example, "probability the transition to the “fluctuation state”), and
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the special effect is derived;
Count updating means (for example, "0 ” clear) and
The special effect lottery means
When the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h can derive the first effect mode or the second effect mode as the special effect) Appropriate judgment in the case of less than "6") and
When the number of times of derivation of the special effect by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, as the special effect, reaching time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h can derive a lottery result other than the second effect mode) Appropriate judgment in the case of "6" or more) and
The gaming machine information indicating means includes:
The game machine E6 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the second effect mode is derived than when the first effect mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state can occur. Here, when the first performance mode is derived based on the lottery result of the special performance lottery means, the game state after the first performance mode is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when the second effect mode is derived based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, the second transition means shifts the game state after the second effect mode to the second game state. Then, the number of derivations of the special performance is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the special performance is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Here, when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means can derive the first effect mode or the second effect mode as the special effect. In addition, when the number of times of derivation of the special effect by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means derives a lottery result other than the second effect mode as a special effect. can be Then, when the second performance mode is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is more likely to be derived than when the first performance mode is derived. That is, the game state after the special effect is derived until the second effect mode in which the game state is shifted to the second game state which is less advantageous than the first game state, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a first performance mode is derived, even when the number of is reduced. As a result, even when the second performance mode is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that it becomes easier for the player to know the information about the game machine, which is disadvantageous (lower in advantage) than the first performance mode for the player. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the second effect mode. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine E6,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine E7 is characterized in that the game machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the second performance mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect mode is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggesting means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the second effect mode is derived in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is not advantageous to the player, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even if the number until the game is played is reduced, the difference between the count value of the special performance and the predetermined number for forcibly deriving the lottery result (for example, the second performance mode) other than the first performance mode is small. Or, when there is none, it makes it easier to derive the game machine information. As a result, for example, even when a second effect mode that is disadvantageous to the player is derived, and the situation where the second effect mode is forcibly derived is approaching, the player does not receive the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to give the merit of being easy to know, and to alleviate the disappointment caused by deriving the second performance mode which is more disadvantageous than the first performance mode for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine E6 or E7,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
When the number of times the special performance is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the second performance mode is derived as the special performance, the special performance lottery means does not derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine E8 characterized by comprising: means.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the special effect by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the second effect mode is derived as the special effect by the special effect lottery means, the information non-deriving means provided in the game machine information suggesting means , is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the second effect mode that is derived when the number of times the special effect is derived reaches a predetermined number, it is an event that is disadvantageous to the player, but is an essential event, so that the gaming machine information is not derived. Configured. That is, since the second effect mode derived when the number of times of deriving the special effect reaches the predetermined number comes, the second effect mode derived when the number of times of deriving the special effect reaches the predetermined number. Also, when the game machine information is derived, the game machine information may be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the second effect mode that is derived when the number of times of derivation of the special effect reaches a predetermined number, by configuring so as not to derive the gaming machine information, the gaming machine information is obtained only by the player's own pull. Since it is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E8,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine E9 is characterized in that, when the first effect mode is derived, the game machine information is difficult to derive when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first presentation mode is derived, the game machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the game machine information to be derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large. That is, the first effect mode is derived in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the first game state to the first game state that is advantageous for the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from the predetermined number from which the second presentation mode is derived. As a result, the first effect mode that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the second effect mode is forcibly derived (for example, at least one special effect derivation opportunity is generated). existence), making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, creating a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E9,
Continuity determination means for determining whether or not the second effect mode has been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized in that the gaming machine information can be easily derived when the second performance mode is derived and the continuity determination means determines that the second performance mode is continuously derived. Machine E10.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E6 to E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the continuation determination means whether or not the second effect mode has been derived continuously. Then, when the second performance mode is derived and the continuous determination means determines that the first special performance is continuously derived, the game machine information suggestion means facilitates the derivation of the game machine information. configured to That is, the second effect mode in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is not advantageous to the player is continuously derived, and the number of times of deriving the special effect by the counting means is predetermined. To facilitate the derivation of game machine information even when the number until reaching the number is continuously reduced. As a result, even when the second performance mode disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the situation where the second performance mode is forcibly derived is approaching, the player does not know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the advantage of making the game easier, and to alleviate the player's disappointment due to the continuous derivation of the second performance mode, which is more disadvantageous than the first performance mode. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E10,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the second effect mode is derived;
a disadvantage frequency update means for updating (initializing) the count result of the disadvantage frequency counting means when the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine E11 is characterized in that when the second performance mode is derived and the number of times of the second performance mode in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E6 to E10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the second effect mode is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the number of the disadvantageous number of times counting means. The result is updated (initialized). When the second performance mode is derived and the number of times of the second performance mode in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information suggesting means is configured to facilitate the derivation of the game machine information. . That is, the second effect mode is derived in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the first game state to the second game state which is not advantageous to the player, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To facilitate the derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of a second performance mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number even when the number until the game is played is reduced. As a result, even when a large number of second performance modes that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation in which the second performance mode is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the second effect mode, which is more disadvantageous than the first effect mode, is derived more often than the first effect mode. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

<Group F: Unfavorable events and advantageous events, advantageous phenomena resulting from the accumulation of adverse events>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In such a gaming machine, the player plays the game while seeking events that are advantageous to him/herself. is configured to occur more frequently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's desire to play will decrease due to the disappointment caused by the frequent occurrence of disadvantageous events for the player, and the player will stop playing the game at the gaming machine, resulting in a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

The invention of group F was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's desire to play.

Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
A gaming machine comprising a determination means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410)) for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means,
a first event generation means for generating a first event advantageous to the player (for example, a 16-round jackpot);
a second event generation means for generating a second event (for example, a 4-round jackpot) that is less advantageous (disadvantageous) for the player than the first event generated by the first event generation means;
counting means (for example, limit counter 203h) for counting at least the number of derivations of the second event;
Gaming machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting gaming machine information related to the gaming machine to the player;
a suggestion lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for randomly determining whether or not to derive the game machine information by the game machine information suggestion means;
The suggestion lottery means
A derivation facilitation means (for example, setting suggestion lottery table 222e) that facilitates derivation of the gaming machine information when the number of derivations of the second event by the counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is provided. Game machine F0.

According to the gaming machine F0, the determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. The first event generating means generates a first event that is advantageous to the player, and the second event generating means generates a second event that is less advantageous to the player than the first event generated by the first event generating means. be done. Then, at least the number of derivations of the second event is counted by the counting means. Here, the gaming machine information suggesting means suggests gaming machine information about the gaming machine to the player, and the suggesting lottery means determines whether or not the gaming machine information suggesting means derives the gaming machine information. Then, when the number of times the counting means derives the second event is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, the game machine information is easily derived by the derivation facilitating means provided in the suggestion lottery means. That is, even if a second event that is more disadvantageous (lower in game value or lower in advantage) for the player than the first event is derived, the number of times the second event is derived is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. To facilitate derivation of game machine information when it becomes. As a result, even when the second event is derived, a merit is given that the player can easily know the information about the game machine, and the second event, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the first event, is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine F0,
The first event generation means is
a first game value imparting means capable of imparting a first game value to a player when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a 16th round jackpot) is derived as a determination result by the determination means;
The second event generating means is
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a 4-round big win or a small win) is derived as a judgment result by the judging means, the advantage for the player is lower than the first game value. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising a second game value imparting means capable of imparting a second game value to a player.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived as a determination result by the determining means, the first game value can be awarded to the player by the first game value giving means provided in the first event generating means. Further, when a second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as a determination result by the determination means, the second game value imparting means provided in the second event generation means determines whether the first game value is higher for the player than the first game value. A second game value with a low degree of advantage can be awarded to the player. As a result, even when the second game value is given to the player, the advantage is given that the player can easily know the information about the gaming machine, and the degree of advantage for the player is lower than that of the first game value. The feeling of disappointment due to the provision of 2 game values can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine F1,
The determination means is
When the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, normal determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h is "6") that can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result Appropriate judgment in the case of less than) and
When the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, an arrival time determination means (for example, when the limit counter 203h is "6" or more) that can derive a lottery result other than the first lottery result In the case of
The derivation facilitation means is
The game machine F2 is characterized in that the game machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result. Further, when the number of times the counting means derives the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means can derive a lottery result other than the first lottery result. When the second lottery result is derived, the derivation facilitation means facilitates derivation of the game machine information when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. In other words, even when the second lottery results that are more disadvantageous (lower in game value or less advantageous) for the player than the first lottery results are derived, the number of times that the second lottery results are derived is large. and when there is little or no difference between the count value of the derivation result of the second lottery result and the predetermined number for forcibly deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, losing), the gaming machine information is displayed. facilitate derivation. As a result, for example, even if a second lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived, and even if the situation approaches that a result other than the second lottery result is forcibly derived, the player will not be able to obtain information about the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the second lottery result, which is more disadvantageous than the first lottery result, for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2,
The suggestion lottery means
When the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, derivation difficulty means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery table 222e) that makes it difficult to derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine F3 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the derivation difficulty means provided in the suggestive lottery means makes it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. Configured. That is, when the difference between the count value of the first lottery result by the counting means and the predetermined number from which the results other than the first lottery result are forcibly derived is large, it is made difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, when there is a margin until reaching a situation where a lottery result other than the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, there is at least one or more predetermined lottery result derivation opportunities), the gaming machine information is made difficult to derive and the rarity of the gaming machine information is increased.

In any of the game machines F0 to F3,
A continuous determination means (for example, a disadvantageous hit flag 223g) that determines whether the second lottery result has been derived continuously,
The derivation facilitation means is
A game characterized by facilitating the derivation of the gaming machine information when the second lottery result is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the second lottery result is continuously derived. Machine F4.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the second lottery result is continuously derived by the continuation determining means. When the second lottery result is derived, the derivation facilitation means facilitates the derivation of the game machine information when the continuity determining means determines that the second lottery result is continuously derived. Configured. That is, the second lottery result, which is not advantageous to the player, is continuously derived from the first lottery result, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number is continuously decreased. To facilitate derivation of game machine information even when a game machine information is lost. As a result, even if the second lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived, and the situation becomes closer to forcibly deriving results other than the second lottery result, the player still receives the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to give the merit of being easy to know, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the continuous derivation of the second lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F4,
The counting means
Disadvantage number counting means for counting the number of times the second lottery result is derived,
The derivation facilitation means is
The game machine F5 is characterized in that when the second lottery result is derived and the number of times of the second lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information can be easily derived.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the second lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantage count counting means provided in the counting means. When the second lottery result is derived and the number of times of the second lottery result in the disadvantage counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the derivation facilitation means facilitates derivation of the gaming machine information. That is, even if a second lottery result that is not advantageous to the player is derived from the first lottery result and the number of times the counting means derives the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, To facilitate the derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of second lottery results is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, even when a large number of second lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation where the second lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player due to the second lottery result being more disadvantageous than the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F5,
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that at least one of the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the determination means is derived,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine F6, wherein the information is suggestive information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting value relating to the probability that at least one of the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the judging means is derived. The gaming machine information is suggestive information that suggests the set value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the second lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information about the set value which is the probability of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result, and the game in the gaming machine is facilitated. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by the derivation of the second lottery result, which is more disadvantageous than the first lottery result, for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F6,
The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the counting means does not notify that the number of times the second lottery result has been derived has reached the predetermined number.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is configured so that the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number is not notified by the counting means. That is, whether the derived lottery result other than the second lottery result was forcibly generated when the number of times the second lottery result was derived reached a predetermined number, or whether the lottery result other than the second lottery result was purely generated. It is configured so that the player cannot distinguish whether it is generated by derivation.

When the number of derivation times of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the lottery result other than the first lottery result is forcibly won, while the number of derivation times of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number. Until then, it is configured to be able to win the first lottery result. Therefore, immediately after the number of derivations of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result is the maximum. When the game is played in this state, the number of times the first lottery result can be derived can be maximized, while the second lottery result can be derived at a timing other than immediately after reaching a predetermined number, i.e., the second lottery result. After the number of times the lottery results have been derived reaches a predetermined number and after at least one or more second lottery results have been derived, the number of times the first lottery results can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of times the second lottery results can be derived is Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the first lottery result can be derived decreases. Therefore, when selecting a gaming machine for playing a game, a player who recognizes that the timing is other than immediately after the number of times of deriving the second lottery result has reached a predetermined number may think that the obtained gaming value is decreasing. As a result, there is a risk that the gaming machine will avoid playing games and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine F7, the fact that the number of times the second lottery result has been derived has reached a predetermined number is not notified to the player, and the derived lottery result other than the first lottery result is the second lottery result. It becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the result is forcibly generated by the number of times of deriving the result reaching a predetermined number or is generated purely by deriving the lottery result other than the first lottery result. configured as follows. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the timing is immediately after the number of times of deriving the second lottery result has been reached, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times of deriving the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult for people to shy away from playing games in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the game machine F7,
The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the difference between the number of times the second lottery results are derived and the predetermined number counted by the counting means is not reported.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the difference between the number of derivations of the second lottery results counted by the counting means and the predetermined number is not reported. That is, it is configured so that the number of times the second lottery result can be derived cannot be determined by the player. As a result, even at a timing other than immediately after the number of derivations of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, it is difficult for people to avoid playing games in the gaming machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. There is

<G Group: Set the number of rounds above the setting stage, and set suggestions can be produced in each round>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines, various effect images corresponding to game specifications are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, there is a tendency to diversify the timing of displaying on the display device in order to further improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-070451)).

However, in the above-described gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately perform the selected effects to improve the interest in the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group G was made in view of the above circumstances, and has the effect of being able to improve the enjoyment of the game by appropriately carrying out the selected effects. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

Game machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect" for suggesting to the player game machine information (for example, probability set value) indicating which state the game machine is in in a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages) )and,
a suggestion lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for randomly determining whether or not to suggest the gaming machine information to the player;
a timing selecting means (for example, a suggestion lottery counter 223i) for selecting a timing for deriving the gaming machine information when suggesting the gaming machine information to the player based on the lottery result of the suggesting lottery means;
a special performance lottery means (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) for randomly determining whether or not to execute a predetermined special performance (for example, a jackpot performance);
Based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, a special effect execution means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) for executing the special effect,
The special production execution means is
As the special performance,
An introductory effect (for example, an opening effect) executed at the beginning,
After the execution of the introductory effect, a staged effect (for example, each round effect) for notifying the progress of the special effect in a plurality of stages;
After execution of the step production, a transition production (for example, ending production) indicating that the special production is shifted to another production (for example, variable production) is configured to be executable,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
By executing the game machine information at the stage of the stage presentation corresponding to the stage of the game machine information, a stage match suggesting means (for example, Execution of "setting suggestion effect" by 6 rounds at probability setting value "6"),
The special game execution means is
A plurality of special effects with different numbers of the staged effects can be executed respectively, and the number of the staged effects equal to or greater than the number of stages of the gaming machine information is executed in all the special effects. Gaming machine G0 to play.

According to the gaming machine G0, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives to the player the gaming machine information indicating in which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages, and the suggesting lottery means guides the gaming machine information to the game. When the game machine information is suggested to the player based on the lottery result of the suggestion lottery means, the timing of deriving the game machine information is selected by the timing selection means. A special performance lottery means draws lots as to whether or not a predetermined special performance is to be executed, and the special performance execution means executes the special performance based on the lottery result of the special performance lottery means. Here, as the special performance executed by the special performance executing means, an introductory performance to be executed at the beginning of the special performance, and a staged performance to notify the progress of the special performance in a plurality of stages after the execution of the introductory performance, After execution of the step performance, a transition performance indicating transition from the special performance to another performance is configured to be executable. In addition, by executing the game machine information in the stage of the stage presentation corresponding to the stage of the game machine information by the stage match suggesting means provided in the game machine information suggesting means, the game machine is provided with a plurality of stages. state is suggested. Here, the special game executing means is configured to be able to execute a plurality of special effects with different numbers of staged effects, and in all the special effects, the number of staged effects equal to or greater than the number of stages of the game machine information is executed. be. That is, when each special effect is executed, in any case, the stage effect equal to or greater than the number of stages of the game machine information is executed, so that no matter what the lottery result is, the stage effect corresponding to the stage of the game machine information is executed. It becomes possible to execute the gaming machine information at the stage of . As a result, the game machine information can be surely executed even if the performance at any stage is selected by the lottery, and the event that the game machine information is not executed due to the absence of the initially set stage performance is prevented. As a result, there is an effect that the selected effect can be performed appropriately and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the gaming machine information can be reliably executed at the execution timing of the selected gaming machine information, there is no need to change the execution timing of the selected gaming machine information to another timing, thereby reducing the control load. It has the effect of being able to In particular, when the timing is changed to another timing, the execution of the game machine information is biased toward the other timing. be.

In gaming machine G0,
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a set value related to the probability that the special effect is derived by the special effect lottery means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine G1 characterized by suggesting information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability of deriving the special effect by the special effect lottery means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, it is possible to reliably suggest to the player the suggestive information that can be a factor in determining whether or not the player wants to continue playing the game on the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that the effect selected by lottery can be appropriately performed to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G0 or G1,
The special game execution means is
First special effect execution means for executing a predetermined first special effect (for example, execution control of a 6-round jackpot);
a second special effect executing means (for example, execution control of a 16-round jackpot) for executing a second special effect more advantageous to the player than the first special effect executed by the first special effect executing means;
A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
A first transition means (for example, "time transition to "shortening state" or transition to "latency probability variation state");
second transition means (for example, "probability the transition to the “fluctuation state”), and
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the special effect is derived;
Count updating means (for example, "0 ” clear) and
The special effect lottery means
When the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h can derive the first special effect or the second special effect as the special effect) Appropriate judgment in the case of less than "6") and
When the number of times of derivation of the special effect by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, as the special effect, reaching time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h can derive a lottery result other than the second special effect) Appropriate judgment in the case of "6" or more) and
The gaming machine information indicating means includes:
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first special performance is derived than when the second special performance is derived.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0 or G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined first special effect is executed by the first special effect executing means provided in the special effect executing means, and the first special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means also provided in the special effect executing means. A second special performance more advantageous to the player than the first special performance executed by means is executed. Also, a predetermined first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated. Here, when the first special performance is derived based on the lottery result of the special performance lottery means, the game state after the first special performance is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when the second special performance is derived based on the lottery result of the special performance lottery means, the second transition means shifts the game state after the second special performance to the second game state. Then, the number of derivations of the special performance is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the special performance is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Here, when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the first special effect or the second special effect can be derived as the special effect by the normal time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means. In addition, when the number of times of derivation of the special effect by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means derives a lottery result other than the second special effect as a special effect. can be Then, when the first special effect is derived by the game machine information suggesting means, the game machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second special effect is derived. That is, the game state after the special effect is derived until the first special effect in which the game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second special performance is derived even when the number of is reduced. As a result, even when the first special performance is derived, the player is provided with the advantage of being able to easily know the information about the game machine, which is more disadvantageous (lower in advantage) for the player than the second special performance. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the first special effect. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine G2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine G3 is characterized in that the game machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first special effect is derived.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special effect is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggesting means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the first special effect is derived in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous to the player, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even when the number of times until the draw is reduced, the difference between the count value of the special performance and the predetermined number for forcibly deriving the lottery result (for example, the first special performance) other than the second special performance is small. Or, when there is none, it makes it easier to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, for example, even if a first special effect that is disadvantageous to the player is derived, and the situation where the first special effect is forcibly derived is approaching, the player does not receive the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to give the merit of being easy to know, and to alleviate the player's disappointment due to the derivation of the first special performance which is more disadvantageous than the second special performance. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine G2 or G3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The special effect lottery means does not derive the gaming machine information when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first special effect is derived as the special effect. Gaming machine G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2 or G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the special effect lottery means derives the special effect by the counting means the number of times to derive the special effect reaches a predetermined number and the first special effect is derived as the special effect, the game machine information suggesting means prevents the game machine information from being derived. configured to That is, in the case of the first special effect derived when the number of times of derivation of the special effect reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so that the gaming machine information is not derived. Configured. That is, since the first special effect derived when the number of times of deriving the special effect reaches the predetermined number is reached, the first special effect derived when the number of times of deriving the special effect reaches the predetermined number. Also, when the game machine information is derived, the game machine information may be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first special effect derived when the number of times of derivation of the special effect reaches a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine information is obtained only by the player's own drawing. Since it is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines G2 to G4,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine G5 is characterized in that it is difficult to derive the game machine information when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large when the second special effect is derived.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second special effect is derived, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large. That is, the second special effect is derived in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous to the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from the predetermined number from which the first special performance is derived at the beginning. As a result, the second special effect that is advantageous for the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first special effect is forcibly derived (for example, at least one special effect derivation opportunity is generated). existence), making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, creating a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines G2 to G5,
Continuous determination means for determining whether or not the first special effect has been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized in that when the first special effect is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the first special effect is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived. Machine G6.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the first special effect is continuously derived by the continuous determination means. Then, when the first special effect is derived, when the continuous determination means determines that the first special effect is continuously derived, the game machine information suggestion means facilitates the derivation of the game machine information. configured to That is, the first special effect in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous to the player is continuously derived, and the number of times of derivation of the special effect by the counting means is predetermined. To facilitate the derivation of game machine information even when the number until reaching the number is continuously reduced. As a result, even when the first special effects that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and the situation in which the first special effects are forcibly derived is approaching, the player does not know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the advantage of making the game easier, and alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the continuous derivation of the first special performance, which is more disadvantageous than the second special performance. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines G2 to G6,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first special effect is derived;
a disadvantage frequency update means for updating (initializing) the count result of the disadvantage frequency counting means when the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that when the first special performance is derived and the number of times of the first special performance in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the first special effect is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the number of the disadvantageous number of times counting means. The result is updated (initialized). Then, when the first special effect is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggesting means when the number of times of the first special effect in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. . That is, the first special effect is derived in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous to the player, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To facilitate the derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of a first special performance is equal to or greater than a predetermined number even when the number until the game is played is reduced. As a result, even when a large number of first special performances that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation in which the first special performance is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player due to the first special effect, which is more disadvantageous than the second special effect, being derived more often. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

<H group: limit measurement with only the number of advantageous hits>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that transitions (or easily transitions) the game state after the end of the game to the first game state.

Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, the first win that transitions the game state after the win to the first game state that is advantageous to the player, and the game state after the win is changed from the first game state to the player. 2nd win which transits to the second game state with high advantage for the player, and the number of times of occurrence of win is counted regardless of the win. Until a predetermined number of wins occur, the first win and the second win can be derived as the types of wins. is not derived, and only the first hit is derived. By configuring in this way, when the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, it is possible to (forcibly) transition to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672) )).

In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first win, which is less advantageous (disadvantageous) for the player than the second win, it is counted as one win, and the number of wins reaches a predetermined number. It is configured such that the remaining number of times (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "remaining number of hits") until reaching the point is reduced. In such a case, the player feels disappointment due to the occurrence of the first win that is disadvantageous to the player instead of the second win, which is advantageous to the player, even though the player has won a lot of effort, and the second win is not good for the player. The number of possible remaining wins decreases and the first win is forcibly generated. Coupled with the feeling of disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times, the motivation to play decreases and the game in the game machine is stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

The inventions of group H have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's desire to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time saving A" or "latency probability change A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the first game state a first transition means to transition to (for example, transition to "time reduction state" or transition to "latency probability change state");
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game a second transition means for transitioning to a state (for example, transitioning to a "probability fluctuation state");
counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the second lottery result is derived from among the predetermined lottery results;
Count update means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a gaming machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting gaming machine information related to the gaming machine to the player;
The determination means is
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, normal determination means (for example, success/failure determination when the limit counter 203h is less than "6");
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, arrival time determination means (for example, (judgement if the limit counter 203h is "6" or more);
The gaming machine information indicating means includes:
A gaming machine H0 characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first lottery result is derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine H0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can occur, and the determination information acquiring means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the second transition means shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state. Then, out of the predetermined lottery results, the number of times the second lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of times the second lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the count updating means , the counting result of the counting means is updated. Further, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. In addition, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result other than the second lottery result A lottery result may be derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the game machine information suggesting means, the game machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, when the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, when the first lottery result is derived, the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. To prevent the number from decreasing until reaching the number and to facilitate the derivation of game machine information more than when the second lottery result is derived. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player is provided with the advantage of being able to easily know the information about the game machine, and the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by being harassed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine H0,
A setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is suggestive information for suggesting to a player the set value set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information about the set value, which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the merit of increasing the decision factor, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine H0 or H1,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine H2 is characterized in that the game machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, even if the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state that is not advantageous to the player, the count value of the second derivation result and the forced To facilitate derivation of game machine information when there is little or no difference from a predetermined number from which a lottery result other than a second lottery result (for example, a first lottery result) is derived. As a result, for example, even if a first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived, the player is given the advantage of being able to easily know the information about the game machine, and the player is more likely than the second lottery result. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the disadvantageous first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines H0 to H2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means. A gaming machine H3 characterized by comprising a non-derivation means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number is reached, it is derived when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived even in the first lottery result, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result that is derived when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is operated only by the draw of the player himself/herself. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A gaming machine H4 characterized in that, when the second lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is difficult to derive when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult to derive the gaming machine information. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous for the player, and the count value of the second lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived) When there is a chance (exists), by making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it creates a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

<Group I: Change the derivation probability of disadvantageous jackpots at the time of limit>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that transitions (or easily transitions) the game state after the end of the game to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672 No. Gazette)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement, although it is necessary to improve the interest in the game.

The invention of group I was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's desire to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
A first probability derivation means capable of deriving a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latency probability change A”) with a predetermined first probability as the predetermined lottery result,
A second probability derivation means capable of deriving a predetermined second lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “probability variable A”) different from the first lottery result as the predetermined lottery result with a predetermined second probability;
When the first lottery result is derived, a first transition means for transitioning the game state after the special game state to the first game state (for example, transition to "time reduction state", or "latency probability the transition to the “fluctuation state”), and
When the second lottery result (for example, the jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the second transition means (for example, "probability fluctuation state ”) and
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
Count updating means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a gaming machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting gaming machine information related to the gaming machine to the player;
The determination means is
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result can be derived with the first derivation probability and the second derivation probability as the predetermined lottery result. Normal time determination means (for example, determination when the limit counter 203h is less than "6") that can derive the second lottery result,
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined lottery result is the third derivation probability with a third derivation probability higher than the first derivation probability and the second derivation probability. 1 arrival time determination means that can derive the lottery result (for example, determination when the limit counter 203h is "6" or more);
The gaming machine information indicating means includes:
A gaming machine I0 characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first lottery result is derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine I0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can occur, and the judgment information acquisition means detects the condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, the first probability deriving means can derive a predetermined first lottery result as a predetermined lottery result with a predetermined first probability, and the second probability deriving means can derive a first lottery result as a predetermined lottery result. A second lottery result different from the result can be derived with a predetermined second probability. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shift means, and when the second lottery result is derived, the second shift means. Thereby, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state. Further, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the count updating means updates the count result of the counting means. Updated. Then, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result as the predetermined lottery result with a first derivation probability. and a second lottery result can be derived with a second derivation probability or a second lottery result can be derived. Further, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result from the first derivation probability and the second derivation probability. The first lottery result can be derived with a high third derivation probability. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the game machine information suggesting means, the game machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player is provided with the advantage of being able to easily know the information about the game machine, and the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by being harassed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine I0,
A setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is suggestive information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to the player.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change the set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, the gaming machine information is suggestive information suggesting the setting value set by the setting means to the player. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information about the set value, which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the merit of increasing the decision factor, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine I0 or I1,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the gaming machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. Even if the number until reaching the number decreases, the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number of forcibly deriving the lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) To facilitate derivation of game machine information when there is little or no difference between . As a result, for example, even if a first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player cannot obtain the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to give the merit of being easy to know, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information when the determining means determines that the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A game machine I3 characterized by comprising a non-derivation means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I0 to I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived even in the first lottery result, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is drawn only by the player's own drawing. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A gaming machine I4 characterized in that, when the second lottery result is derived, if the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult to derive the gaming machine information. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous for the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived) When there is a chance (exists), by making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it creates a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

<J group: Timing for deriving a plurality of advantageous information>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state after the end of the hit game can be transitioned to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. In addition, there is also a function (so-called limiter function) that transitions (or easily transitions) the game state after the end of the game to the first game state.

Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, the first win that transitions the game state after the win to the first game state that is advantageous to the player, and the game state after the win is changed from the first game state to the player. 2nd win which transits to the second game state with high advantage for the player, and the number of times of occurrence of win is counted regardless of the win. Until a predetermined number of wins occur, the first win and the second win can be derived as the types of wins. is not derived, and only the first hit is derived. By configuring in this way, when the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, it is possible to (forcibly) transition to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672) )).

In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first win, which is less advantageous (disadvantageous) for the player than the second win, it is counted as one win, and the number of wins reaches a predetermined number. It is configured such that the remaining number of times (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "remaining number of hits") until reaching the point is reduced. In such a case, the player feels disappointment due to the occurrence of the first win that is disadvantageous to the player instead of the second win, which is advantageous to the player, even though the player has won a lot of effort, and the second win is not good for the player. The number of possible remaining wins decreases and the first win is forcibly generated. Coupled with the feeling of disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times, the motivation to play decreases and the game in the game machine is stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

The invention of Group J was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's desire to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, "time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state");
a second game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
Determination information acquisition means (e.g., first start port 64a) for acquiring determination information (e.g., value of jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning a prize to first start port 64a);
Determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S410));
A special game generation means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, the big winning opening opening and closing control process (S509)),
setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a set value relating to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means;
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time saving A" or "latency probability change A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the first game state a first transition means to transition to (for example, transition to "time reduction state" or transition to "latency probability change state");
As the predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type "probability variation A") is derived, the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game a second transition means for transitioning to a state (for example, transitioning to a "probability fluctuation state");
a counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
Count updating means (for example, limit counter 203 h "0" clear) and
a gaming machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting gaming machine information related to the gaming machine to the player;
The determination means is
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, normal determination means (for example, success/failure determination when the limit counter 203h is less than "6");
When the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, arrival time determination means (for example, (judgement if the limit counter 203h is "6" or more);
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
setting information suggesting means (e.g., "setting suggestion effect") for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, setting value information relating to the setting value set by the setting means;
number information suggesting means (for example, "remaining limit number suggesting effect") for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, number information relating to the number of times of derivation counted by the counting means;
start timing non-overlapping means (for example, "round start display , and a "setting suggestion effect" in displaying the total number of prize balls during a round game).

According to the game machine J0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the determination information acquiring means determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. The determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to set a set value relating to the probability that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means. Then, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as a predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the second transition means shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state. When the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the number of derivation times of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the count updating means. Updated. Further, the gaming machine information regarding the gaming machine is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. Here, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the normal determination means provided in the determination means derives the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. In addition, when the number of times that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result other than the second lottery result A lottery result may be derived. Here, set value information about the set value set by the setting means is suggested as game machine information by the setting information suggesting means provided in the game machine information suggesting means, and the number of times information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is also provided. The suggesting means suggests, as the gaming machine information, number-of-times information relating to the number of derivations counted by the counting means. Then, the start timing non-overlapping means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means prevents the setting value information suggesting start timing by the setting information suggesting means and the number information suggesting start timing by the number information suggesting means from overlapping. executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance from overlooking either one of the set value information or the number of times information due to overlapping execution of the set value information and the number of times information, and to prevent the player from getting confused about the contents of the set value information and the number of times information. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is played, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

In gaming machine J0,
The gaming machine information indicating means includes:
A gaming machine J1 characterized by further comprising derivation mode changing means for changing a derivation mode of said gaming machine information from when said second lottery result is derived when said first lottery result is derived. .

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by derivation mode changing means provided in the game machine information suggesting means, the derivation mode of the game machine information is changed from when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number is reduced, the derivation mode of the game machine information is changed and executed from when the second lottery result is derived. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the information regarding the gaming machine is changed so that the player can obtain different information than when the second lottery result is derived. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The derivation mode changing means is
The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the gaming machine information is easier to derive when the first lottery result is derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the derivation mode changing means, the gaming machine information is more likely to be derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. To make it easier to derive game machine information than when a second lottery result is derived even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the player is provided with the advantage of being able to easily know the information about the game machine, and the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. It can alleviate the disappointment caused by being harassed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Suggestion embodying means (e.g. suggestion content lottery table 222f) capable of embodying the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived continuously, when the second lottery result is derived A gaming machine J3, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the suggestion materializing means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information can be materialized when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the first game state which is less advantageous than the second game state, and the first lottery result is derived, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number decreases, it becomes easier to recognize the gaming machine information more accurately than when the second lottery result is derived. Thus, even when the result of the first lottery is derived, the player is provided with the advantage that the information about the game machine can be easily recognized accurately, and the first lottery is more disadvantageous to the player than the result of the second lottery. The disappointment caused by deriving results can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

The ``suggestion materializing means capable of embodying the gaming machine information'' means, for example, direct contents (for example, ``immediate value suggestion'') so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. ), or when the content of the gaming machine information is abstracted (eg, “1 negative suggestion”) to make it easier for the player to understand (recognize) the content (eg, “1 negative suggestion”) embodied (detailed) (eg, "Direct price suggestion"), when displaying content that can be guessed from content that is difficult to guess from gaming machine information (for example, "456 suggestion"), gaming machine information from a state where it is difficult to visually recognize is derived in a readily visible state, and a case in which the gaming machine information is derived from an inaccurate state in a state in which the gaming machine information can be more accurately recognized is exemplified.

In any of the game machines J0 to J3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine J4 is characterized in that the game machine information can be easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the first lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent. . That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. Even if the number until reaching the number decreases, the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number of forcibly deriving the lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) To facilitate derivation of game machine information when there is little or no difference between . As a result, for example, even if a first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player cannot obtain the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to give the merit of being easy to know, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J4,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
Information not to derive the gaming machine information when the determining means determines that the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A game machine J5 characterized by comprising non-derivation means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the determining means, the information provided in the game machine information suggesting means is not derived. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so the gaming machine information is not derived. configured as That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is derived when the number of derivations of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If gaming machine information is derived even in the first lottery result, there is a risk that the gaming machine information will be derived frequently. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game machine information is not derived, so that the game machine is drawn only by the player's own drawing. Since the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability depending on whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J5,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A gaming machine J6 characterized in that it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large when the second lottery result is derived.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult to derive the gaming machine information. That is, the second lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state that is advantageous for the player, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory game state are calculated. To make it difficult to derive game machine information when there is a large difference from a predetermined number from which a first lottery result is derived. As a result, the second lottery result that is advantageous to the player is derived, and there is a margin until the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived) When there is a chance (exists), by making it difficult to derive the gaming machine information and increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it creates a game element that determines whether the gaming machine information is derived or not, and the interest of the game. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of the game machines J0 to J6,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery results have been derived continuously,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
A game characterized by facilitating derivation of the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived and the continuity determining means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine J7.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the first lottery results are continuously derived by the continuation determining means. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, the game machine information is easily derived by the game machine information suggestion means when it is determined by the continuous determination means that the first lottery result is continuously derived. configured to That is, the first lottery result in which the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means. To facilitate derivation of game machine information even when the number until the number of times reaches a predetermined number is continuously reduced. As a result, even if the first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player will not know the information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide the advantage of making it easier for the player, and to alleviate the player's disappointment caused by the continuous derivation of the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J6,
disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
disadvantageous number update means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the disadvantageous number counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
The game machine J8 is characterized in that when the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game machine information can be easily derived.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number of times updating means updates the disadvantageous number of times counting means. is updated (initialized). When the first lottery result is derived and the number of times of the first lottery result in the disadvantage counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or more), the gaming machine information suggesting means derives the gaming machine information. configured for ease of use. That is, the first lottery result is derived such that the game state after the special game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state which is not advantageous for the player, and the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is predetermined. To facilitate derivation of game machine information when the number of derivations of a first lottery result is equal to or greater than a predetermined number even when the number until reaching the number is reduced. As a result, even when many first lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player are derived and the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived is approaching, the player can easily know the information about the game machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the first lottery results, which are more disadvantageous than the second lottery results, are derived more often. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

For any one of the game machines A0 to A13, the game machines B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the gaming machines B0 to B12, the gaming machines A0 to A13, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the gaming machines C0 to C16, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines D0 to D16, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines E0 to E11, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines F0 to F7, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines G0 to G7, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines H0 to H4, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines I0 to I4, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H4 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the game machines J0 to J8, the game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 The configuration limited in any one of to I4 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any one of game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to I4, and J0 to J8, the game machine A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to I4, and J0 to J8, the game machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to I4, and J0 to J8, the game machine A game machine Z3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a First starting port (part of determination information acquisition means, part of first ball entry means, part of first firing mode entry means)
64b Second starting port (part of second firing mode entry means)
64c Ordinary electric role (part of movable means)
65 variable winning device (a part of variable winning means)
67 through gate (part of the second ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of game machine information suggestion means, part of special effect execution means)
112a ball launch unit (part of launch means)
203h limit counter (part of counting means)
222e setting suggestion lottery table (part of derivation facilitation means)
222f Suggestion content lottery table (part of suggestion materialization means)
223d Setting value memory (part of setting means)
223e sub-limit counter (part of counting means)
223f Setting suggestion lottery counter (part of derivation facilitation means, part of gaming machine information lottery means, part of suggestion lottery means)
223g disadvantageous hit flag (part of continuous discrimination means)
223h Pullback counter (part of derivation facilitation means, part of probability increasing means, part of facilitation continuation means, part of pullback counting means, part of suggestion materialization means, part of materialization continuation means)
223i Suggestion lottery counter (part of information selection means, part of timing selection means)
501 setting key (part of setting means)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of special effect lottery means)
S410 Fluctuation start processing (part of determination means)
S509 Big winning opening opening/closing control process (part of special game generating means)
S561 (part of count updating means)
S1216 (part of facilitation end means, part of materialization end means)

Claims (1)

a predetermined first game state;
a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and
determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
determination means for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means;
a special game generating means for generating a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player based on the determination means deriving a predetermined lottery result,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means;
a first shift means for shifting the game state after the special game state to the first game state when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result;
second transition means for shifting the game state after the special game state to the second game state when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result;
a counting means for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived;
a count update means for updating the count result of the counting means when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means;
a gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information about the gaming machine to the player;
The determination means is
normal determination means capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result is less than the predetermined number;
an arrival time determining means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result when the number of times the counting means derives the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. prepared,
The gaming machine information suggesting means includes:
setting information suggesting means for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, setting value information relating to the setting value set by the setting means;
count information suggesting means for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, count information relating to the number of derivations counted by the counting means;
a start timing non-overlapping means for executing the start timing of suggestion of the set value information by the setting information suggestion means and the start timing of suggestion of the number of times information by the number of times information suggestion means so as not to overlap each other. A game machine characterized by

Images